|
7
|
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
|
|
|
2 *
|
|
|
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
|
|
|
4 *
|
|
|
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
|
|
|
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
|
|
|
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
|
|
|
8 */
|
|
|
9
|
|
|
10 /*
|
|
|
11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by:
|
|
|
12 *
|
|
70
|
13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
|
|
7
|
14 *
|
|
|
15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of
|
|
|
16 * course Bram Moolenaar!
|
|
|
17 *
|
|
|
18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by:
|
|
|
19 *
|
|
|
20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca>
|
|
|
21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net>
|
|
|
22 */
|
|
|
23
|
|
|
24 #include "vim.h"
|
|
|
25 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
26 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */
|
|
|
27 # ifdef _
|
|
|
28 # undef _
|
|
|
29 # endif
|
|
|
30 # ifdef N_
|
|
|
31 # undef N_
|
|
|
32 # endif
|
|
|
33 # ifdef textdomain
|
|
|
34 # undef textdomain
|
|
|
35 # endif
|
|
|
36 # ifdef bindtextdomain
|
|
|
37 # undef bindtextdomain
|
|
|
38 # endif
|
|
|
39 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS)
|
|
|
40 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */
|
|
|
41 # endif
|
|
|
42 # include <gnome.h>
|
|
|
43 # include "version.h"
|
|
|
44 #endif
|
|
|
45
|
|
|
46 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
47 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */
|
|
|
48 # define GdkAtom int
|
|
|
49 # define GdkEventExpose int
|
|
|
50 # define GdkEventFocus int
|
|
|
51 # define GdkEventVisibility int
|
|
|
52 # define GdkEventProperty int
|
|
|
53 # define GtkContainer int
|
|
|
54 # define GtkTargetEntry int
|
|
|
55 # define GtkType int
|
|
|
56 # define GtkWidget int
|
|
|
57 # define gint int
|
|
|
58 # define gpointer int
|
|
|
59 # define guint int
|
|
|
60 # define GdkEventKey int
|
|
|
61 # define GdkEventSelection int
|
|
|
62 # define GtkSelectionData int
|
|
|
63 # define GdkEventMotion int
|
|
|
64 # define GdkEventButton int
|
|
|
65 # define GdkDragContext int
|
|
|
66 # define GdkEventConfigure int
|
|
|
67 # define GdkEventClient int
|
|
|
68 #else
|
|
|
69 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h>
|
|
|
70 # include <gdk/gdk.h>
|
|
|
71 # ifdef WIN3264
|
|
|
72 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h>
|
|
|
73 # else
|
|
|
74 # include <gdk/gdkx.h>
|
|
|
75 # endif
|
|
|
76
|
|
|
77 # include <gtk/gtk.h>
|
|
|
78 # include "gui_gtk_f.h"
|
|
|
79 #endif
|
|
|
80
|
|
|
81 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H
|
|
|
82 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h>
|
|
|
83 #endif
|
|
|
84
|
|
|
85 /*
|
|
|
86 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support.
|
|
|
87 */
|
|
|
88 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
89 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \
|
|
|
90 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom)
|
|
|
91 #else
|
|
|
92 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom))
|
|
|
93 #endif
|
|
|
94
|
|
|
95 /* Selection type distinguishers */
|
|
|
96 enum
|
|
|
97 {
|
|
|
98 TARGET_TYPE_NONE,
|
|
|
99 TARGET_UTF8_STRING,
|
|
|
100 TARGET_STRING,
|
|
|
101 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT,
|
|
|
102 TARGET_TEXT,
|
|
|
103 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST,
|
|
|
104 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN,
|
|
|
105 TARGET_VIM,
|
|
|
106 TARGET_VIMENC
|
|
|
107 };
|
|
|
108
|
|
|
109 /*
|
|
|
110 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim.
|
|
|
111 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first.
|
|
|
112 */
|
|
|
113 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] =
|
|
|
114 {
|
|
|
115 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC},
|
|
|
116 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM},
|
|
|
117 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
118 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING},
|
|
|
119 #endif
|
|
|
120 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT},
|
|
|
121 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT},
|
|
|
122 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}
|
|
|
123 };
|
|
|
124 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0]))
|
|
|
125
|
|
|
126 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
127 /*
|
|
|
128 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim.
|
|
|
129 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first.
|
|
|
130 */
|
|
|
131 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] =
|
|
|
132 {
|
|
|
133 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST},
|
|
|
134 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
135 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING},
|
|
|
136 # endif
|
|
|
137 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING},
|
|
|
138 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN}
|
|
|
139 };
|
|
|
140 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0]))
|
|
|
141 #endif
|
|
|
142
|
|
|
143
|
|
|
144 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
145 /*
|
|
|
146 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present
|
|
|
147 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations.
|
|
|
148 */
|
|
|
149 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10"
|
|
|
150
|
|
|
151 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
152 /*
|
|
|
153 * This is the single only fixed width font in X11, which seems to be present
|
|
|
154 * on all servers and available in all the variants we need.
|
|
|
155 */
|
|
|
156 # define DEFAULT_FONT "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-m-*-*-*"
|
|
|
157
|
|
|
158 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
159
|
|
|
160 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
161 /*
|
|
|
162 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There
|
|
|
163 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant.
|
|
|
164 */
|
|
|
165 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
166 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
167 #endif
|
|
|
168
|
|
|
169 /*
|
|
|
170 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections.
|
|
|
171 */
|
|
|
172 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
173 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
174 #endif
|
|
|
175 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
176 static GdkAtom compound_text_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
177 static GdkAtom text_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
178 #endif
|
|
|
179 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */
|
|
|
180 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
181 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */
|
|
|
182 #endif
|
|
|
183
|
|
|
184 /*
|
|
|
185 * Keycodes recognized by vim.
|
|
|
186 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same
|
|
|
187 * change!
|
|
|
188 */
|
|
|
189 static struct special_key
|
|
|
190 {
|
|
|
191 guint key_sym;
|
|
|
192 char_u code0;
|
|
|
193 char_u code1;
|
|
|
194 }
|
|
|
195 const special_keys[] =
|
|
|
196 {
|
|
|
197 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'},
|
|
|
198 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'},
|
|
|
199 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'},
|
|
|
200 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'},
|
|
|
201 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'},
|
|
|
202 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'},
|
|
|
203 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'},
|
|
|
204 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'},
|
|
|
205 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'},
|
|
|
206 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'},
|
|
|
207 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'},
|
|
|
208 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'},
|
|
|
209 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'},
|
|
|
210 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'},
|
|
|
211 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'},
|
|
|
212 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'},
|
|
|
213 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'},
|
|
|
214 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'},
|
|
|
215 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'},
|
|
|
216 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'},
|
|
|
217 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'},
|
|
|
218 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'},
|
|
|
219 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'},
|
|
|
220 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'},
|
|
|
221 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'},
|
|
|
222 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */
|
|
|
223 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'},
|
|
|
224 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'},
|
|
|
225 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'},
|
|
|
226 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'},
|
|
|
227 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'},
|
|
|
228 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'},
|
|
|
229 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'},
|
|
|
230 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'},
|
|
|
231 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'},
|
|
|
232 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'},
|
|
|
233 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'},
|
|
|
234 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'},
|
|
|
235 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'},
|
|
|
236 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'},
|
|
|
237 #ifdef SunXK_F36
|
|
|
238 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'},
|
|
|
239 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'},
|
|
|
240 #endif
|
|
|
241 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'},
|
|
|
242 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'},
|
|
|
243 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'},
|
|
|
244 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'},
|
|
|
245 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'},
|
|
|
246 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'},
|
|
|
247 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'},
|
|
|
248 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'},
|
|
|
249 {GDK_End, '@', '7'},
|
|
|
250 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'},
|
|
|
251 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'},
|
|
|
252 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'},
|
|
|
253 /* Keypad keys: */
|
|
|
254 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'},
|
|
|
255 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'},
|
|
|
256 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'},
|
|
|
257 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'},
|
|
|
258 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS},
|
|
|
259 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL},
|
|
|
260 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'},
|
|
|
261 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'},
|
|
|
262 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */
|
|
|
263 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */
|
|
|
264
|
|
|
265 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'},
|
|
|
266 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'},
|
|
|
267 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'},
|
|
|
268 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'},
|
|
|
269 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'},
|
|
|
270 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'},
|
|
|
271
|
|
|
272 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'},
|
|
|
273 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'},
|
|
|
274 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'},
|
|
|
275 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'},
|
|
|
276 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'},
|
|
|
277 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'},
|
|
|
278 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'},
|
|
|
279 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'},
|
|
|
280 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'},
|
|
|
281 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'},
|
|
|
282
|
|
|
283 /* End of list marker: */
|
|
|
284 {0, 0, 0}
|
|
|
285 };
|
|
|
286
|
|
|
287 /*
|
|
|
288 * Flags for command line options table below.
|
|
|
289 */
|
|
|
290 #define ARG_FONT 1
|
|
|
291 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2
|
|
|
292 #define ARG_REVERSE 3
|
|
|
293 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4
|
|
|
294 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5
|
|
|
295 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6
|
|
|
296 #define ARG_ICONIC 7
|
|
|
297 #define ARG_ROLE 8
|
|
|
298 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9
|
|
|
299 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */
|
|
|
300 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */
|
|
|
301 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff
|
|
|
302 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */
|
|
|
303 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */
|
|
|
304 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */
|
|
|
305 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */
|
|
|
306 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */
|
|
|
307
|
|
|
308 /*
|
|
|
309 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes
|
|
|
310 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the
|
|
|
311 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later).
|
|
|
312 *
|
|
|
313 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!!
|
|
|
314 */
|
|
|
315 typedef struct
|
|
|
316 {
|
|
|
317 const char *name;
|
|
|
318 unsigned int flags;
|
|
|
319 }
|
|
|
320 cmdline_option_T;
|
|
|
321
|
|
|
322 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] =
|
|
|
323 {
|
|
|
324 /* We handle these options ourselves */
|
|
|
325 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
326 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
327 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
328 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
329 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE},
|
|
|
330 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE},
|
|
|
331 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE},
|
|
|
332 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE},
|
|
|
333 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
334 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
335 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
336 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
337 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC},
|
|
|
338 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
339 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
340 #endif
|
|
|
341 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
342 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */
|
|
|
343 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
344 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
345 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
346 #endif
|
|
|
347 #if 0 /* not implemented; these arguments don't make sense for GTK+ */
|
|
|
348 {"-boldfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
349 {"-italicfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
350 {"-bw", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
351 {"-borderwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
352 {"-sw", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
353 {"-scrollbarwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
354 #endif
|
|
|
355 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */
|
|
|
356 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
357 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
358 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
359 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
360 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
361 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
362 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
363 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
364 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
365 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
366 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
367 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
368 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
369 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
370 #else /* these don't seem to exist anymore */
|
|
|
371 {"--no-xshm", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
372 {"--xim-preedit", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
373 {"--xim-status", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
374 {"--gxid_host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
375 {"--gxid_port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
376 #endif
|
|
|
377 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
378 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
379 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
380 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
381 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
382 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
383 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
384 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
385 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
386 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
387 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
388 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
389 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP},
|
|
|
390 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
391 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */
|
|
|
392 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
393 # endif
|
|
|
394 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
395 #endif
|
|
|
396 {NULL, 0}
|
|
|
397 };
|
|
|
398
|
|
|
399 static int gui_argc = 0;
|
|
|
400 static char **gui_argv = NULL;
|
|
|
401
|
|
|
402 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
403 static const char *role_argument = NULL;
|
|
|
404 #endif
|
|
|
405 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
406 static const char *restart_command = NULL;
|
|
|
407 #endif
|
|
|
408 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE;
|
|
|
409
|
|
|
410 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
411 /*
|
|
|
412 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given
|
|
|
413 */
|
|
|
414 static int using_gnome = 0;
|
|
|
415 #else
|
|
|
416 # define using_gnome 0
|
|
|
417 #endif
|
|
|
418
|
|
|
419 /*
|
|
|
420 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are
|
|
|
421 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called
|
|
|
422 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started.
|
|
|
423 */
|
|
|
424 void
|
|
|
425 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv)
|
|
|
426 {
|
|
|
427 const cmdline_option_T *option;
|
|
|
428 int i = 0;
|
|
|
429 int len = 0;
|
|
|
430
|
|
|
431 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
432 /*
|
|
|
433 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart
|
|
|
434 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory
|
|
|
435 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is.
|
|
|
436 */
|
|
|
437 restart_command = argv[0];
|
|
|
438
|
|
|
439 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL)
|
|
|
440 {
|
|
|
441 char_u buf[MAXPATHL];
|
|
|
442
|
|
|
443 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK)
|
|
|
444 /* Tiny leak; doesn't matter, and usually we don't even get here */
|
|
|
445 restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf);
|
|
|
446 }
|
|
|
447 #endif
|
|
|
448
|
|
|
449 /*
|
|
|
450 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME
|
|
|
451 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init().
|
|
|
452 */
|
|
|
453 gui_argc = 0;
|
|
|
454 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *)));
|
|
|
455
|
|
|
456 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL);
|
|
|
457
|
|
|
458 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++];
|
|
|
459
|
|
|
460 while (i < *argc)
|
|
|
461 {
|
|
|
462 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */
|
|
|
463 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+')
|
|
|
464 {
|
|
|
465 ++i;
|
|
|
466 continue;
|
|
|
467 }
|
|
|
468
|
|
|
469 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */
|
|
|
470 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option)
|
|
|
471 {
|
|
|
472 len = strlen(option->name);
|
|
|
473
|
|
|
474 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0)
|
|
|
475 {
|
|
|
476 if (argv[i][len] == '\0')
|
|
|
477 break;
|
|
|
478 /* allow --foo=bar style */
|
|
|
479 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE))
|
|
|
480 break;
|
|
|
481 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
482 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */
|
|
|
483 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL
|
|
|
484 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS)
|
|
|
485 break;
|
|
|
486 #endif
|
|
|
487 }
|
|
|
488 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG)
|
|
|
489 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0)
|
|
|
490 {
|
|
|
491 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display"
|
|
|
492 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */
|
|
|
493 argv[i] = (char *)option->name;
|
|
|
494 break;
|
|
|
495 }
|
|
|
496 }
|
|
|
497 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */
|
|
|
498 {
|
|
|
499 ++i;
|
|
|
500 continue;
|
|
|
501 }
|
|
|
502
|
|
|
503 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK)
|
|
|
504 {
|
|
|
505 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which
|
|
|
506 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */
|
|
|
507 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i];
|
|
|
508 }
|
|
|
509 else
|
|
|
510 {
|
|
|
511 char *value = NULL;
|
|
|
512
|
|
|
513 /* Extract the option's value if there is one.
|
|
|
514 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */
|
|
|
515 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)
|
|
|
516 {
|
|
|
517 if (argv[i][len] == '=')
|
|
|
518 value = &argv[i][len + 1];
|
|
|
519 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0)
|
|
|
520 value = argv[i + 1];
|
|
|
521 }
|
|
|
522
|
|
|
523 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */
|
|
|
524 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK)
|
|
|
525 {
|
|
|
526 case ARG_REVERSE:
|
|
|
527 found_reverse_arg = TRUE;
|
|
|
528 break;
|
|
|
529 case ARG_NOREVERSE:
|
|
|
530 found_reverse_arg = FALSE;
|
|
|
531 break;
|
|
|
532 case ARG_FONT:
|
|
|
533 font_argument = value;
|
|
|
534 break;
|
|
|
535 case ARG_GEOMETRY:
|
|
|
536 if (value != NULL)
|
|
|
537 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value);
|
|
|
538 break;
|
|
|
539 case ARG_BACKGROUND:
|
|
|
540 background_argument = value;
|
|
|
541 break;
|
|
|
542 case ARG_FOREGROUND:
|
|
|
543 foreground_argument = value;
|
|
|
544 break;
|
|
|
545 case ARG_ICONIC:
|
|
|
546 found_iconic_arg = TRUE;
|
|
|
547 break;
|
|
|
548 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
549 case ARG_ROLE:
|
|
|
550 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */
|
|
|
551 break;
|
|
|
552 #endif
|
|
|
553 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
554 case ARG_NETBEANS:
|
|
|
555 ++usingNetbeans;
|
|
|
556 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */
|
|
|
557 netbeansArg = argv[i];
|
|
|
558 break;
|
|
|
559 #endif
|
|
|
560 default:
|
|
|
561 break;
|
|
|
562 }
|
|
|
563 }
|
|
|
564
|
|
|
565 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit.
|
|
|
566 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */
|
|
|
567 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI)
|
|
|
568 gui.starting = TRUE;
|
|
|
569
|
|
|
570 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP)
|
|
|
571 ++i;
|
|
|
572 else
|
|
|
573 {
|
|
|
574 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */
|
|
|
575 if (--*argc > i)
|
|
|
576 {
|
|
|
577 int n_strip = 1;
|
|
|
578
|
|
|
579 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */
|
|
|
580 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)
|
|
|
581 && argv[i][len] != '='
|
|
|
582 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0)
|
|
|
583 {
|
|
|
584 ++n_strip;
|
|
|
585 --*argc;
|
|
|
586 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK)
|
|
|
587 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1];
|
|
|
588 }
|
|
|
589
|
|
|
590 if (*argc > i)
|
|
|
591 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip],
|
|
|
592 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *));
|
|
|
593 }
|
|
|
594 argv[*argc] = NULL;
|
|
|
595 }
|
|
|
596 }
|
|
|
597
|
|
|
598 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL;
|
|
|
599 }
|
|
|
600
|
|
|
601 /*
|
|
|
602 * This should be maybe completely removed.
|
|
|
603 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on
|
|
|
604 * this information. --danielk
|
|
|
605 */
|
|
|
606 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
607 static gint
|
|
|
608 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventVisibility *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
609 {
|
|
|
610 gui.visibility = event->state;
|
|
|
611 /*
|
|
|
612 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially
|
|
|
613 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked
|
|
|
614 * or not.
|
|
|
615 */
|
|
|
616 if (gui.text_gc != NULL)
|
|
|
617 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
618 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
619 return FALSE;
|
|
|
620 }
|
|
|
621
|
|
|
622 /*
|
|
|
623 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen.
|
|
|
624 */
|
|
|
625 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
626 static gint
|
|
|
627 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventExpose *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
628 {
|
|
|
629 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */
|
|
|
630 if (gui.starting)
|
|
|
631 return FALSE;
|
|
|
632
|
|
|
633 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */
|
|
|
634 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y,
|
|
|
635 event->area.width, event->area.height);
|
|
|
636
|
|
|
637 /* Clear the border areas if needed */
|
|
|
638 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0))
|
|
|
639 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0);
|
|
|
640 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0))
|
|
|
641 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0));
|
|
|
642 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns))
|
|
|
643 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
644 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0);
|
|
|
645 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows))
|
|
|
646 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0);
|
|
|
647
|
|
|
648 return FALSE;
|
|
|
649 }
|
|
|
650
|
|
|
651 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER
|
|
|
652 /*
|
|
|
653 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property
|
|
|
654 */
|
|
|
655 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
656 static gint
|
|
|
657 property_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventProperty *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
658 {
|
|
|
659 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY
|
|
|
660 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE
|
|
|
661 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow
|
|
|
662 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty)
|
|
|
663 {
|
|
|
664 XEvent xev;
|
|
|
665
|
|
|
666 /* Translate to XLib */
|
|
|
667 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify;
|
|
|
668 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty;
|
|
|
669 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow;
|
|
|
670 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue;
|
|
|
671 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev);
|
|
|
672
|
|
|
673 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
674 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
675 }
|
|
|
676 return FALSE;
|
|
|
677 }
|
|
|
678 #endif
|
|
|
679
|
|
|
680
|
|
|
681 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
682 * Focus handlers:
|
|
|
683 */
|
|
|
684
|
|
|
685
|
|
|
686 /*
|
|
|
687 * This is a simple state machine:
|
|
|
688 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all
|
|
|
689 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown
|
|
|
690 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown
|
|
|
691 */
|
|
|
692
|
|
|
693 #define BLINK_NONE 0
|
|
|
694 #define BLINK_OFF 1
|
|
|
695 #define BLINK_ON 2
|
|
|
696
|
|
|
697 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE;
|
|
|
698 static long_u blink_waittime = 700;
|
|
|
699 static long_u blink_ontime = 400;
|
|
|
700 static long_u blink_offtime = 250;
|
|
|
701 static guint blink_timer = 0;
|
|
|
702
|
|
|
703 void
|
|
|
704 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off)
|
|
|
705 {
|
|
|
706 blink_waittime = waittime;
|
|
|
707 blink_ontime = on;
|
|
|
708 blink_offtime = off;
|
|
|
709 }
|
|
|
710
|
|
|
711 /*
|
|
|
712 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown.
|
|
|
713 */
|
|
|
714 void
|
|
|
715 gui_mch_stop_blink(void)
|
|
|
716 {
|
|
|
717 if (blink_timer)
|
|
|
718 {
|
|
|
719 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer);
|
|
|
720 blink_timer = 0;
|
|
|
721 }
|
|
|
722 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF)
|
|
|
723 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
724 blink_state = BLINK_NONE;
|
|
|
725 }
|
|
|
726
|
|
|
727 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
728 static gint
|
|
|
729 blink_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
730 {
|
|
|
731 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON)
|
|
|
732 {
|
|
|
733 gui_undraw_cursor();
|
|
|
734 blink_state = BLINK_OFF;
|
|
|
735 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime,
|
|
|
736 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
737 }
|
|
|
738 else
|
|
|
739 {
|
|
|
740 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
741 blink_state = BLINK_ON;
|
|
|
742 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime,
|
|
|
743 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
744 }
|
|
|
745
|
|
|
746 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
747 }
|
|
|
748
|
|
|
749 /*
|
|
|
750 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the
|
|
|
751 * waiting time and shows the cursor.
|
|
|
752 */
|
|
|
753 void
|
|
|
754 gui_mch_start_blink(void)
|
|
|
755 {
|
|
|
756 if (blink_timer)
|
|
|
757 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer);
|
|
|
758 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */
|
|
|
759 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus)
|
|
|
760 {
|
|
|
761 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime,
|
|
|
762 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
763 blink_state = BLINK_ON;
|
|
|
764 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
765 }
|
|
|
766 }
|
|
|
767
|
|
|
768 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
769 static gint
|
|
|
770 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventCrossing *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
771 {
|
|
|
772 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
773 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
774
|
|
|
775 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */
|
|
|
776 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea))
|
|
|
777 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
778
|
|
|
779 return FALSE;
|
|
|
780 }
|
|
|
781
|
|
|
782 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
783 static gint
|
|
|
784 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventCrossing *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
785 {
|
|
|
786 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
787 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
788
|
|
|
789 return FALSE;
|
|
|
790 }
|
|
|
791
|
|
|
792 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
793 static gint
|
|
|
794 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventFocus *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
795 {
|
|
|
796 gui_focus_change(TRUE);
|
|
|
797
|
|
|
798 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
799 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
800
|
|
|
801 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */
|
|
|
802 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
803 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
804
|
|
|
805 return TRUE;
|
|
|
806 }
|
|
|
807
|
|
|
808 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
809 static gint
|
|
|
810 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventFocus *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
811 {
|
|
|
812 gui_focus_change(FALSE);
|
|
|
813
|
|
|
814 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
815 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
816
|
|
|
817 return TRUE;
|
|
|
818 }
|
|
|
819
|
|
|
820
|
|
|
821 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
822 /*
|
|
|
823 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale.
|
|
|
824 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes
|
|
|
825 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes.
|
|
|
826 *
|
|
|
827 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use
|
|
|
828 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why:
|
|
|
829 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey
|
|
|
830 */
|
|
|
831 static int
|
|
|
832 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string)
|
|
|
833 {
|
|
|
834 int len;
|
|
|
835 guint32 uc;
|
|
|
836
|
|
|
837 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval);
|
|
|
838 if (uc != 0)
|
|
|
839 {
|
|
|
840 /* Check for CTRL-foo */
|
|
|
841 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80)
|
|
|
842 {
|
|
|
843 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact
|
|
|
844 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my
|
|
|
845 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes
|
|
|
846 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */
|
|
|
847 if (uc >= '@')
|
|
|
848 string[0] = uc & 0x1F;
|
|
|
849 else if (uc == '2')
|
|
|
850 string[0] = NUL;
|
|
|
851 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7')
|
|
|
852 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28;
|
|
|
853 else if (uc == '8')
|
|
|
854 string[0] = BS;
|
|
|
855 else if (uc == '?')
|
|
|
856 string[0] = DEL;
|
|
|
857 else
|
|
|
858 string[0] = uc;
|
|
|
859 len = 1;
|
|
|
860 }
|
|
|
861 else
|
|
|
862 {
|
|
|
863 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead
|
|
|
864 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */
|
|
|
865 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string);
|
|
|
866 }
|
|
|
867 }
|
|
|
868 else
|
|
|
869 {
|
|
|
870 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim.
|
|
|
871 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to
|
|
|
872 * special terminal-like control sequences. */
|
|
|
873 len = 1;
|
|
|
874 switch (keyval)
|
|
|
875 {
|
|
|
876 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab:
|
|
|
877 string[0] = TAB;
|
|
|
878 break;
|
|
|
879 case GDK_Linefeed:
|
|
|
880 string[0] = NL;
|
|
|
881 break;
|
|
|
882 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter:
|
|
|
883 string[0] = CAR;
|
|
|
884 break;
|
|
|
885 case GDK_Escape:
|
|
|
886 string[0] = ESC;
|
|
|
887 break;
|
|
|
888 default:
|
|
|
889 len = 0;
|
|
|
890 break;
|
|
|
891 }
|
|
|
892 }
|
|
|
893 string[len] = NUL;
|
|
|
894
|
|
|
895 return len;
|
|
|
896 }
|
|
|
897 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
898
|
|
|
899 /*
|
|
|
900 * Main keyboard handler:
|
|
|
901 */
|
|
|
902 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
903 static gint
|
|
|
904 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventKey *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
905 {
|
|
|
906 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
907 /* 256 bytes is way over the top, but for safety let's reduce it only
|
|
|
908 * for GTK+ 2 where we know for sure how large the string might get.
|
|
|
909 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */
|
|
|
910 char_u string[32], string2[32];
|
|
|
911 #else
|
|
|
912 char_u string[256], string2[256];
|
|
|
913 #endif
|
|
|
914 guint key_sym;
|
|
|
915 int len;
|
|
|
916 int i;
|
|
|
917 int modifiers;
|
|
|
918 int key;
|
|
|
919 guint state;
|
|
|
920 char_u *s, *d;
|
|
|
921
|
|
|
922 key_sym = event->keyval;
|
|
|
923 state = event->state;
|
|
|
924 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* deprecated */
|
|
|
925 len = event->length;
|
|
|
926 g_assert(len <= sizeof(string));
|
|
|
927 #endif
|
|
|
928
|
|
|
929 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
930 /*
|
|
|
931 * It appears as if we always want to consume a key-press (there currently
|
|
|
932 * aren't any 'return FALSE's), so we always do this: when running in a
|
|
|
933 * GtkPlug and not a window, we must prevent emission of the key_press
|
|
|
934 * EVENT from continuing (which is 'beyond' the level of stopping mere
|
|
|
935 * signals by returning FALSE), otherwise things like tab/cursor-keys are
|
|
|
936 * processed by the GtkPlug default handler, which moves input focus away
|
|
|
937 * from us!
|
|
|
938 * Note: This should no longer be necessary with GTK+ 2.
|
|
|
939 */
|
|
|
940 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
941 gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "key_press_event");
|
|
|
942 #endif
|
|
|
943
|
|
|
944 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
945 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE))
|
|
|
946 return TRUE;
|
|
|
947 #endif
|
|
|
948
|
|
|
949 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN
|
|
|
950 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK))
|
|
|
951 {
|
|
|
952 hangul_input_state_toggle();
|
|
|
953 return TRUE;
|
|
|
954 }
|
|
|
955 #endif
|
|
|
956
|
|
|
957 #ifdef SunXK_F36
|
|
|
958 /*
|
|
|
959 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is
|
|
|
960 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible
|
|
|
961 * combination of modifiers.
|
|
|
962 */
|
|
|
963 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37)
|
|
|
964 len = 0;
|
|
|
965 else
|
|
|
966 #endif
|
|
|
967 {
|
|
|
968 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
969 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2);
|
|
|
970
|
|
|
971 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character.
|
|
|
972 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */
|
|
|
973 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
974 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2));
|
|
|
975
|
|
|
976 s = string2;
|
|
|
977 #else
|
|
|
978 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
979 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
980 {
|
|
|
981 mch_memmove(string2, event->string, len);
|
|
|
982 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2));
|
|
|
983 s = string2;
|
|
|
984 }
|
|
|
985 else
|
|
|
986 # endif
|
|
|
987 s = (char_u *)event->string;
|
|
|
988 #endif
|
|
|
989
|
|
|
990 d = string;
|
|
|
991 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
992 {
|
|
|
993 *d++ = s[i];
|
|
|
994 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string))
|
|
|
995 {
|
|
|
996 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */
|
|
|
997 *d++ = KS_EXTRA;
|
|
|
998 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI;
|
|
|
999 }
|
|
|
1000 }
|
|
|
1001 len = d - string;
|
|
|
1002 }
|
|
|
1003
|
|
|
1004 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */
|
|
|
1005 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab)
|
|
|
1006 {
|
|
|
1007 key_sym = GDK_Tab;
|
|
|
1008 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK;
|
|
|
1009 }
|
|
|
1010
|
|
|
1011 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* for GTK+ 2, we handle this in keyval_to_string() */
|
|
|
1012 if ((key_sym == GDK_2 || key_sym == GDK_at) && (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK))
|
|
|
1013 {
|
|
|
1014 string[0] = NUL; /* CTRL-2 and CTRL-@ is NUL */
|
|
|
1015 len = 1;
|
|
|
1016 }
|
|
|
1017 else if (len == 0 && (key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab))
|
|
|
1018 {
|
|
|
1019 /* When there are modifiers, these keys get zero length; we need the
|
|
|
1020 * original key here to be able to add a modifier below. */
|
|
|
1021 string[0] = (key_sym & 0xff);
|
|
|
1022 len = 1;
|
|
|
1023 }
|
|
|
1024 #endif
|
|
|
1025
|
|
|
1026 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
1027 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key
|
|
|
1028 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */
|
|
|
1029 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1030 && gui.menu_is_active
|
|
|
1031 && (*p_wak == 'y'
|
|
|
1032 || (*p_wak == 'm'
|
|
|
1033 && len == 1
|
|
|
1034 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0]))))
|
|
|
1035 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1036 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the
|
|
|
1037 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */
|
|
|
1038 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1039 # else
|
|
|
1040 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1041 # endif
|
|
|
1042 #endif
|
|
|
1043
|
|
|
1044 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character
|
|
|
1045 * that already has the 8th bit set.
|
|
|
1046 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT.
|
|
|
1047 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead
|
|
|
1048 * byte. */
|
|
|
1049 if (len == 1
|
|
|
1050 && (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1051 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete)
|
|
|
1052 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0
|
|
|
1053 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK))
|
|
|
1054 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1055 && !enc_dbcs
|
|
|
1056 #endif
|
|
|
1057 )
|
|
|
1058 {
|
|
|
1059 string[0] |= 0x80;
|
|
|
1060 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */
|
|
|
1061 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1062 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */
|
|
|
1063 {
|
|
|
1064 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf;
|
|
|
1065 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0;
|
|
|
1066 if (string[1] == CSI)
|
|
|
1067 {
|
|
|
1068 string[2] = KS_EXTRA;
|
|
|
1069 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI;
|
|
|
1070 len = 4;
|
|
|
1071 }
|
|
|
1072 else
|
|
|
1073 len = 2;
|
|
|
1074 }
|
|
|
1075 #endif
|
|
|
1076 }
|
|
|
1077
|
|
|
1078 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII
|
|
|
1079 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */
|
|
|
1080 if (len == 0 || len == 1)
|
|
|
1081 {
|
|
|
1082 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++)
|
|
|
1083 {
|
|
|
1084 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym)
|
|
|
1085 {
|
|
|
1086 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1087 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0;
|
|
|
1088 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1;
|
|
|
1089 len = -3;
|
|
|
1090 break;
|
|
|
1091 }
|
|
|
1092 }
|
|
|
1093 }
|
|
|
1094
|
|
|
1095 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */
|
|
|
1096 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1097
|
|
|
1098 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
1099 /* Cancel or type backspace. For GTK2, im_commit_cb() does the same. */
|
|
|
1100 preedit_start_col = MAXCOL;
|
|
|
1101 xim_changed_while_preediting = TRUE;
|
|
|
1102 #endif
|
|
|
1103
|
|
|
1104 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a
|
|
|
1105 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */
|
|
|
1106 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab
|
|
|
1107 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed
|
|
|
1108 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab
|
|
|
1109 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter
|
|
|
1110 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1111 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK))
|
|
|
1112 #endif
|
|
|
1113 )
|
|
|
1114 {
|
|
|
1115 modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
1116 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
1117 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT;
|
|
|
1118 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
1119 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL;
|
|
|
1120 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1121 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT;
|
|
|
1122
|
|
|
1123 /*
|
|
|
1124 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key
|
|
|
1125 * code.
|
|
|
1126 */
|
|
|
1127 if (len == -3)
|
|
|
1128 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]);
|
|
|
1129 else
|
|
|
1130 key = string[0];
|
|
|
1131
|
|
|
1132 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers);
|
|
|
1133 if (key == CSI)
|
|
|
1134 key = K_CSI;
|
|
|
1135 if (IS_SPECIAL(key))
|
|
|
1136 {
|
|
|
1137 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1138 string[1] = K_SECOND(key);
|
|
|
1139 string[2] = K_THIRD(key);
|
|
|
1140 len = 3;
|
|
|
1141 }
|
|
|
1142 else
|
|
|
1143 {
|
|
|
1144 string[0] = key;
|
|
|
1145 len = 1;
|
|
|
1146 }
|
|
|
1147
|
|
|
1148 if (modifiers != 0)
|
|
|
1149 {
|
|
|
1150 string2[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1151 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER;
|
|
|
1152 string2[2] = modifiers;
|
|
|
1153 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3);
|
|
|
1154 }
|
|
|
1155 }
|
|
|
1156
|
|
|
1157 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts)
|
|
|
1158 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C)))
|
|
|
1159 {
|
|
|
1160 trash_input_buf();
|
|
|
1161 got_int = TRUE;
|
|
|
1162 }
|
|
|
1163
|
|
|
1164 add_to_input_buf(string, len);
|
|
|
1165
|
|
|
1166 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */
|
|
|
1167 if (p_mh)
|
|
|
1168 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE);
|
|
|
1169
|
|
|
1170 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1171 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1172
|
|
|
1173 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1174 }
|
|
|
1175
|
|
|
1176 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
1177 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
1178 static gboolean
|
|
|
1179 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventKey *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1180 {
|
|
|
1181 /*
|
|
|
1182 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too.
|
|
|
1183 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point
|
|
|
1184 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits.
|
|
|
1185 */
|
|
|
1186 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE);
|
|
|
1187 }
|
|
|
1188 #endif
|
|
|
1189
|
|
|
1190
|
|
|
1191 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1192 * Selection handlers:
|
|
|
1193 */
|
|
|
1194
|
|
|
1195 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1196 static gint
|
|
|
1197 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1198 GdkEventSelection *event,
|
|
|
1199 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
1200 {
|
|
|
1201 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1202 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus);
|
|
|
1203 else
|
|
|
1204 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star);
|
|
|
1205
|
|
|
1206 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1207 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1208
|
|
|
1209 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1210 }
|
|
|
1211
|
|
|
1212 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */
|
|
|
1213 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */
|
|
|
1214 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */
|
|
|
1215 static int received_selection = RS_NONE;
|
|
|
1216
|
|
|
1217 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1218 static void
|
|
|
1219 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1220 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
1221 guint time_,
|
|
|
1222 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
1223 {
|
|
|
1224 VimClipboard *cbd;
|
|
|
1225 char_u *text;
|
|
|
1226 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL;
|
|
|
1227 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1228 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL;
|
|
|
1229 #endif
|
|
|
1230 int len;
|
|
|
1231 int motion_type;
|
|
|
1232
|
|
|
1233 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1234 cbd = &clip_plus;
|
|
|
1235 else
|
|
|
1236 cbd = &clip_star;
|
|
|
1237
|
|
|
1238 text = (char_u *)data->data;
|
|
|
1239 len = data->length;
|
|
|
1240 motion_type = MCHAR;
|
|
|
1241
|
|
|
1242 if (text == NULL || len <= 0)
|
|
|
1243 {
|
|
|
1244 received_selection = RS_FAIL;
|
|
|
1245 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */
|
|
|
1246
|
|
|
1247 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1248 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1249
|
|
|
1250 return;
|
|
|
1251 }
|
|
|
1252
|
|
|
1253 if (data->type == vim_atom)
|
|
|
1254 {
|
|
|
1255 motion_type = *text++;
|
|
|
1256 --len;
|
|
|
1257 }
|
|
|
1258
|
|
|
1259 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1260 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom)
|
|
|
1261 {
|
|
|
1262 char_u *enc;
|
|
|
1263 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1264
|
|
|
1265 motion_type = *text++;
|
|
|
1266 --len;
|
|
|
1267
|
|
|
1268 enc = text;
|
|
|
1269 text += STRLEN(text) + 1;
|
|
|
1270 len -= text - enc;
|
|
|
1271
|
|
|
1272 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt
|
|
|
1273 * converting it. */
|
|
|
1274 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1275 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc);
|
|
|
1276 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1277 {
|
|
|
1278 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
1279 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1280 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1281 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1282 }
|
|
|
1283 }
|
|
|
1284 #endif
|
|
|
1285
|
|
|
1286 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1287 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details
|
|
|
1288 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */
|
|
|
1289 else
|
|
|
1290 {
|
|
|
1291 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data);
|
|
|
1292 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL)
|
|
|
1293 {
|
|
|
1294 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8);
|
|
|
1295 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1296 {
|
|
|
1297 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len);
|
|
|
1298 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1299 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1300 }
|
|
|
1301 else
|
|
|
1302 text = tmpbuf_utf8;
|
|
|
1303 }
|
|
|
1304 }
|
|
|
1305 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1306 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1307 else if (data->type == utf8_string_atom)
|
|
|
1308 {
|
|
|
1309 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1310
|
|
|
1311 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1312 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc);
|
|
|
1313
|
|
|
1314 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1315 {
|
|
|
1316 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
1317 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1318 }
|
|
|
1319 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1320 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1321 }
|
|
|
1322 # endif
|
|
|
1323 else if (data->type == compound_text_atom || data->type == text_atom)
|
|
|
1324 {
|
|
|
1325 char **list = NULL;
|
|
|
1326 int count;
|
|
|
1327 int i;
|
|
|
1328 unsigned tmplen = 0;
|
|
|
1329
|
|
|
1330 count = gdk_text_property_to_text_list(data->type, data->format,
|
|
|
1331 data->data, data->length,
|
|
|
1332 &list);
|
|
|
1333 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
1334 tmplen += strlen(list[i]);
|
|
|
1335
|
|
|
1336 tmpbuf = alloc(tmplen + 1);
|
|
|
1337 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1338 {
|
|
|
1339 tmpbuf[0] = NUL;
|
|
|
1340 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
1341 STRCAT(tmpbuf, list[i]);
|
|
|
1342 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1343 len = tmplen;
|
|
|
1344 }
|
|
|
1345
|
|
|
1346 if (list != NULL)
|
|
|
1347 gdk_free_text_list(list);
|
|
|
1348 }
|
|
|
1349 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1350
|
|
|
1351 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd);
|
|
|
1352 received_selection = RS_OK;
|
|
|
1353 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
1354 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1355 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8);
|
|
|
1356 #endif
|
|
|
1357
|
|
|
1358 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1359 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1360 }
|
|
|
1361
|
|
|
1362 /*
|
|
|
1363 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection
|
|
|
1364 * client.
|
|
|
1365 */
|
|
|
1366 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1367 static void
|
|
|
1368 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1369 GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
|
|
|
1370 guint info,
|
|
|
1371 guint time_,
|
|
|
1372 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
1373 {
|
|
|
1374 char_u *string;
|
|
|
1375 char_u *tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1376 long_u tmplen;
|
|
|
1377 int length;
|
|
|
1378 int motion_type;
|
|
|
1379 GdkAtom type;
|
|
|
1380 VimClipboard *cbd;
|
|
|
1381
|
|
|
1382 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1383 cbd = &clip_plus;
|
|
|
1384 else
|
|
|
1385 cbd = &clip_star;
|
|
|
1386
|
|
|
1387 if (!cbd->owned)
|
|
|
1388 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */
|
|
|
1389
|
|
|
1390 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING
|
|
|
1391 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1392 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING
|
|
|
1393 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC
|
|
|
1394 #endif
|
|
|
1395 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM
|
|
|
1396 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT
|
|
|
1397 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT)
|
|
|
1398 return;
|
|
|
1399
|
|
|
1400 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */
|
|
|
1401 clip_get_selection(cbd);
|
|
|
1402
|
|
|
1403 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd);
|
|
|
1404 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL)
|
|
|
1405 return;
|
|
|
1406 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also
|
|
|
1407 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case.
|
|
|
1408 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */
|
|
|
1409 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1));
|
|
|
1410
|
|
|
1411 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM)
|
|
|
1412 {
|
|
|
1413 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1);
|
|
|
1414 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1415 {
|
|
|
1416 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type;
|
|
|
1417 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length);
|
|
|
1418 }
|
|
|
1419 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */
|
|
|
1420 ++length;
|
|
|
1421 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1422 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1423 type = vim_atom;
|
|
|
1424 }
|
|
|
1425
|
|
|
1426 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1427 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC)
|
|
|
1428 {
|
|
|
1429 int l = STRLEN(p_enc);
|
|
|
1430
|
|
|
1431 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */
|
|
|
1432 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2);
|
|
|
1433 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1434 {
|
|
|
1435 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type;
|
|
|
1436 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc);
|
|
|
1437 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length);
|
|
|
1438 }
|
|
|
1439 length += l + 2;
|
|
|
1440 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1441 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1442 type = vimenc_atom;
|
|
|
1443 }
|
|
|
1444 #endif
|
|
|
1445
|
|
|
1446 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1447 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is
|
|
|
1448 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */
|
|
|
1449 else
|
|
|
1450 {
|
|
|
1451 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1452 {
|
|
|
1453 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length);
|
|
|
1454 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1455 if (tmpbuf == NULL)
|
|
|
1456 return;
|
|
|
1457 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1458 }
|
|
|
1459 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */
|
|
|
1460 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL))
|
|
|
1461 {
|
|
|
1462 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data,
|
|
|
1463 (const char *)string, length);
|
|
|
1464 }
|
|
|
1465 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1466 return;
|
|
|
1467 }
|
|
|
1468 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1469 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1470 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING)
|
|
|
1471 {
|
|
|
1472 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1473
|
|
|
1474 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1475 convert_setup(&conv, p_enc, (char_u *)"utf-8");
|
|
|
1476
|
|
|
1477 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1478 {
|
|
|
1479 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length);
|
|
|
1480 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1481 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1482 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1483 }
|
|
|
1484 type = utf8_string_atom;
|
|
|
1485 }
|
|
|
1486 # endif
|
|
|
1487 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT
|
|
|
1488 || info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT)
|
|
|
1489 {
|
|
|
1490 int format;
|
|
|
1491
|
|
|
1492 /* Copy the string to ensure NUL-termination */
|
|
|
1493 tmpbuf = vim_strnsave(string, length);
|
|
|
1494 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1495 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1496 {
|
|
|
1497 gdk_string_to_compound_text((const char *)tmpbuf,
|
|
|
1498 &type, &format, &string, &length);
|
|
|
1499 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
1500 selection_data->type = type;
|
|
|
1501 selection_data->format = format;
|
|
|
1502 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, format, string, length);
|
|
|
1503 gdk_free_compound_text(string);
|
|
|
1504 }
|
|
|
1505 return;
|
|
|
1506 }
|
|
|
1507 else
|
|
|
1508 {
|
|
|
1509 type = GDK_TARGET_STRING;
|
|
|
1510 }
|
|
|
1511 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1512
|
|
|
1513 if (string != NULL)
|
|
|
1514 {
|
|
|
1515 selection_data->type = selection_data->target;
|
|
|
1516 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */
|
|
|
1517
|
|
|
1518 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length);
|
|
|
1519 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1520 }
|
|
|
1521 }
|
|
|
1522
|
|
|
1523 /*
|
|
|
1524 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced.
|
|
|
1525 * Return OK or FAIL.
|
|
|
1526 */
|
|
|
1527 int
|
|
|
1528 gui_mch_init_check(void)
|
|
|
1529 {
|
|
|
1530 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1531 /* This is needed to make the locale handling consistant between the GUI
|
|
|
1532 * and the rest of VIM. */
|
|
|
1533 gtk_set_locale();
|
|
|
1534 #endif
|
|
|
1535
|
|
|
1536 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
1537 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
1538 using_gnome = 1;
|
|
|
1539 #endif
|
|
|
1540
|
|
|
1541 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */
|
|
|
1542 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv))
|
|
|
1543 {
|
|
|
1544 gui.dying = TRUE;
|
|
|
1545 EMSG(_(e_opendisp));
|
|
|
1546 return FAIL;
|
|
|
1547 }
|
|
|
1548
|
|
|
1549 return OK;
|
|
|
1550 }
|
|
|
1551
|
|
|
1552
|
|
|
1553 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1554 * Mouse handling callbacks
|
|
|
1555 */
|
|
|
1556
|
|
|
1557
|
|
|
1558 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1559 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
1560
|
|
|
1561 /*
|
|
|
1562 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button
|
|
|
1563 */
|
|
|
1564 static gint
|
|
|
1565 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
1566 {
|
|
|
1567 /* we don't use this information currently */
|
|
|
1568 int *timed_out = (int *) data;
|
|
|
1569
|
|
|
1570 *timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
1571 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
1572 }
|
|
|
1573
|
|
|
1574 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1575 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE;
|
|
|
1576 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer);
|
|
|
1577
|
|
|
1578 static void
|
|
|
1579 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state)
|
|
|
1580 {
|
|
|
1581 int button;
|
|
|
1582 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1583
|
|
|
1584 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK |
|
|
|
1585 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK |
|
|
|
1586 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))
|
|
|
1587 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' ';
|
|
|
1588
|
|
|
1589 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */
|
|
|
1590 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE);
|
|
|
1591
|
|
|
1592 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button
|
|
|
1593 * being pressed. */
|
|
|
1594 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG)
|
|
|
1595 {
|
|
|
1596 gui_mouse_moved(x, y);
|
|
|
1597 return;
|
|
|
1598 }
|
|
|
1599
|
|
|
1600 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */
|
|
|
1601 vim_modifiers = 0x0;
|
|
|
1602 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
1603 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
1604 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
1605 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
1606 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1607 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
1608
|
|
|
1609 /* inform the editor engine about the occurence of this event */
|
|
|
1610 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1611
|
|
|
1612 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1613 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1614
|
|
|
1615 /*
|
|
|
1616 * Auto repeat timer handling.
|
|
|
1617 */
|
|
|
1618 if (x < 0 || y < 0
|
|
|
1619 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width
|
|
|
1620 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height)
|
|
|
1621 {
|
|
|
1622
|
|
|
1623 int dx;
|
|
|
1624 int dy;
|
|
|
1625 int offshoot;
|
|
|
1626 int delay = 10;
|
|
|
1627
|
|
|
1628 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area.
|
|
|
1629 * (offshoot can't become negative here!).
|
|
|
1630 */
|
|
|
1631 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width;
|
|
|
1632 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height;
|
|
|
1633
|
|
|
1634 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy;
|
|
|
1635
|
|
|
1636 /* Make a linearly declaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a
|
|
|
1637 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window.
|
|
|
1638 *
|
|
|
1639 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here.
|
|
|
1640 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the
|
|
|
1641 * drags start instead...
|
|
|
1642 *
|
|
|
1643 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too...
|
|
|
1644 */
|
|
|
1645 if (offshoot > 127)
|
|
|
1646 {
|
|
|
1647 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */
|
|
|
1648 delay = 5;
|
|
|
1649 }
|
|
|
1650 else
|
|
|
1651 {
|
|
|
1652 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5;
|
|
|
1653 }
|
|
|
1654
|
|
|
1655 /* shoot again */
|
|
|
1656 if (!motion_repeat_timer)
|
|
|
1657 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay,
|
|
|
1658 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
1659 }
|
|
|
1660 }
|
|
|
1661
|
|
|
1662 /*
|
|
|
1663 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button.
|
|
|
1664 */
|
|
|
1665 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
1666 static gint
|
|
|
1667 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
1668 {
|
|
|
1669 int x;
|
|
|
1670 int y;
|
|
|
1671 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
1672
|
|
|
1673 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state);
|
|
|
1674
|
|
|
1675 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK |
|
|
|
1676 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK |
|
|
|
1677 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)))
|
|
|
1678 {
|
|
|
1679 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1680 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1681 }
|
|
|
1682
|
|
|
1683 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another
|
|
|
1684 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */
|
|
|
1685 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10)
|
|
|
1686 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1687
|
|
|
1688 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1689
|
|
|
1690 /*
|
|
|
1691 * Fake a motion event.
|
|
|
1692 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other
|
|
|
1693 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still
|
|
|
1694 * in the same character.
|
|
|
1695 */
|
|
|
1696 if (motion_repeat_offset)
|
|
|
1697 x += gui.char_width;
|
|
|
1698
|
|
|
1699 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset;
|
|
|
1700 process_motion_notify(x, y, state);
|
|
|
1701
|
|
|
1702 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event
|
|
|
1703 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */
|
|
|
1704 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1705 }
|
|
|
1706
|
|
|
1707 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
1708 static gint
|
|
|
1709 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1710 {
|
|
|
1711 if (event->is_hint)
|
|
|
1712 {
|
|
|
1713 int x;
|
|
|
1714 int y;
|
|
|
1715 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
1716
|
|
|
1717 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state);
|
|
|
1718 process_motion_notify(x, y, state);
|
|
|
1719 }
|
|
|
1720 else
|
|
|
1721 {
|
|
|
1722 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y,
|
|
|
1723 (GdkModifierType)event->state);
|
|
|
1724 }
|
|
|
1725
|
|
|
1726 return TRUE; /* handled */
|
|
|
1727 }
|
|
|
1728
|
|
|
1729
|
|
|
1730 /*
|
|
|
1731 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's
|
|
|
1732 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself.
|
|
|
1733 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks.
|
|
|
1734 */
|
|
|
1735 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
1736 static gint
|
|
|
1737 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1738 {
|
|
|
1739 int button;
|
|
|
1740 int repeated_click = FALSE;
|
|
|
1741 int x, y;
|
|
|
1742 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1743
|
|
|
1744 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */
|
|
|
1745 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget))
|
|
|
1746 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget);
|
|
|
1747
|
|
|
1748 /*
|
|
|
1749 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us
|
|
|
1750 * after the initial button press event confuse us.
|
|
|
1751 */
|
|
|
1752 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
|
|
|
1753 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1754
|
|
|
1755 x = event->x;
|
|
|
1756 y = event->y;
|
|
|
1757
|
|
|
1758 /* Handle multiple clicks */
|
|
|
1759 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer)
|
|
|
1760 {
|
|
|
1761 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer);
|
|
|
1762 mouse_click_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1763 repeated_click = TRUE;
|
|
|
1764 }
|
|
|
1765
|
|
|
1766 mouse_timed_out = FALSE;
|
|
|
1767 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset,
|
|
|
1768 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out);
|
|
|
1769
|
|
|
1770 switch (event->button)
|
|
|
1771 {
|
|
|
1772 case 1:
|
|
|
1773 button = MOUSE_LEFT;
|
|
|
1774 break;
|
|
|
1775 case 2:
|
|
|
1776 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE;
|
|
|
1777 break;
|
|
|
1778 case 3:
|
|
|
1779 button = MOUSE_RIGHT;
|
|
|
1780 break;
|
|
|
1781 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1782 case 4:
|
|
|
1783 button = MOUSE_4;
|
|
|
1784 break;
|
|
|
1785 case 5:
|
|
|
1786 button = MOUSE_5;
|
|
|
1787 break;
|
|
|
1788 #endif
|
|
|
1789 default:
|
|
|
1790 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */
|
|
|
1791 }
|
|
|
1792
|
|
|
1793 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1794 /* cancel any preediting */
|
|
|
1795 if (im_is_preediting())
|
|
|
1796 xim_reset();
|
|
|
1797 #endif
|
|
|
1798
|
|
|
1799 vim_modifiers = 0x0;
|
|
|
1800 if (event->state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
1801 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
1802 if (event->state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
1803 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
1804 if (event->state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1805 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
1806
|
|
|
1807 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1808 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1809 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1810
|
|
|
1811 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1812 }
|
|
|
1813
|
|
|
1814 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1815 /*
|
|
|
1816 * GTK+ 2 doesn't handle mouse buttons 4, 5, 6 and 7 the same way as GTK+ 1.
|
|
|
1817 * Instead, it abstracts scrolling via the new GdkEventScroll.
|
|
|
1818 */
|
|
|
1819 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
1820 static gboolean
|
|
|
1821 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventScroll *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1822 {
|
|
|
1823 int button;
|
|
|
1824 int_u vim_modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
1825
|
|
|
1826 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget))
|
|
|
1827 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget);
|
|
|
1828
|
|
|
1829 switch (event->direction)
|
|
|
1830 {
|
|
|
1831 case GDK_SCROLL_UP:
|
|
|
1832 button = MOUSE_4;
|
|
|
1833 break;
|
|
|
1834 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN:
|
|
|
1835 button = MOUSE_5;
|
|
|
1836 break;
|
|
|
1837 default: /* We don't care about left and right... Yet. */
|
|
|
1838 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1839 }
|
|
|
1840
|
|
|
1841 # ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1842 /* cancel any preediting */
|
|
|
1843 if (im_is_preediting())
|
|
|
1844 xim_reset();
|
|
|
1845 # endif
|
|
|
1846
|
|
|
1847 if (event->state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
1848 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
1849 if (event->state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
1850 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
1851 if (event->state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1852 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
1853
|
|
|
1854 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y,
|
|
|
1855 FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1856
|
|
|
1857 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1858 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1859
|
|
|
1860 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1861 }
|
|
|
1862 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1863
|
|
|
1864
|
|
|
1865 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1866 static gint
|
|
|
1867 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1868 {
|
|
|
1869 int x, y;
|
|
|
1870 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1871
|
|
|
1872 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further
|
|
|
1873 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window
|
|
|
1874 area .*/
|
|
|
1875 if (motion_repeat_timer)
|
|
|
1876 {
|
|
|
1877 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer);
|
|
|
1878 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1879 }
|
|
|
1880
|
|
|
1881 x = event->x;
|
|
|
1882 y = event->y;
|
|
|
1883
|
|
|
1884 vim_modifiers = 0x0;
|
|
|
1885 if (event->state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
1886 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
1887 if (event->state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
1888 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
1889 if (event->state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1890 vim_modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
1891
|
|
|
1892 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1893 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1894 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure it will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1895
|
|
|
1896 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1897 }
|
|
|
1898
|
|
|
1899
|
|
|
1900 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
1901 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1902 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers.
|
|
|
1903 */
|
|
|
1904
|
|
|
1905 /*
|
|
|
1906 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL.
|
|
|
1907 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented,
|
|
|
1908 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with
|
|
|
1909 * NUL characters.
|
|
|
1910 */
|
|
|
1911 static int
|
|
|
1912 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len)
|
|
|
1913 {
|
|
|
1914 int i;
|
|
|
1915 char_u *p = out;
|
|
|
1916 int count = 0;
|
|
|
1917
|
|
|
1918 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
1919 {
|
|
|
1920 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r')
|
|
|
1921 {
|
|
|
1922 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL)
|
|
|
1923 {
|
|
|
1924 ++count;
|
|
|
1925 *p++ = NUL;
|
|
|
1926 }
|
|
|
1927 }
|
|
|
1928 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0)
|
|
|
1929 {
|
|
|
1930 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1);
|
|
|
1931 i += 2;
|
|
|
1932 }
|
|
|
1933 else
|
|
|
1934 *p++ = raw[i];
|
|
|
1935 }
|
|
|
1936 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL)
|
|
|
1937 {
|
|
|
1938 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */
|
|
|
1939 ++count;
|
|
|
1940 }
|
|
|
1941 return count;
|
|
|
1942 }
|
|
|
1943
|
|
|
1944 /*
|
|
|
1945 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On
|
|
|
1946 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return
|
|
|
1947 * length of array (less than "max").
|
|
|
1948 */
|
|
|
1949 static int
|
|
|
1950 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src)
|
|
|
1951 {
|
|
|
1952 int i, j;
|
|
|
1953
|
|
|
1954 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i)
|
|
|
1955 {
|
|
|
1956 outlist[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
1957 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0)
|
|
|
1958 {
|
|
|
1959 src += 5;
|
|
|
1960 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0)
|
|
|
1961 src += 11;
|
|
|
1962 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/')
|
|
|
1963 ++src;
|
|
|
1964 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src);
|
|
|
1965 }
|
|
|
1966 src += STRLEN(src) + 1;
|
|
|
1967 }
|
|
|
1968 return j;
|
|
|
1969 }
|
|
|
1970
|
|
|
1971 static char_u **
|
|
|
1972 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len)
|
|
|
1973 {
|
|
|
1974 int n = 0;
|
|
|
1975 char_u *tmp = NULL;
|
|
|
1976 char_u **array = NULL;;
|
|
|
1977
|
|
|
1978 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL)
|
|
|
1979 {
|
|
|
1980 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len);
|
|
|
1981 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL)
|
|
|
1982 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp);
|
|
|
1983 }
|
|
|
1984 vim_free(tmp);
|
|
|
1985 *count = n;
|
|
|
1986 return array;
|
|
|
1987 }
|
|
|
1988
|
|
|
1989 static void
|
|
|
1990 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
1991 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
1992 guint time_,
|
|
|
1993 GdkModifierType state,
|
|
|
1994 gint x,
|
|
|
1995 gint y)
|
|
|
1996 {
|
|
|
1997 char_u **fnames;
|
|
|
1998 int nfiles = 0;
|
|
|
1999
|
|
|
2000 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length);
|
|
|
2001
|
|
|
2002 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0)
|
|
|
2003 {
|
|
|
2004 int_u modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
2005
|
|
|
2006 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */
|
|
|
2007
|
|
|
2008 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
2009 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
2010 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
2011 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
2012 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
2013 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
2014
|
|
|
2015 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles);
|
|
|
2016 }
|
|
|
2017 }
|
|
|
2018
|
|
|
2019 static void
|
|
|
2020 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2021 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2022 guint time_,
|
|
|
2023 GdkModifierType state)
|
|
|
2024 {
|
|
|
2025 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP};
|
|
|
2026 char_u *text;
|
|
|
2027 int len;
|
|
|
2028 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2029 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL;
|
|
|
2030 # endif
|
|
|
2031
|
|
|
2032 text = data->data;
|
|
|
2033 len = data->length;
|
|
|
2034
|
|
|
2035 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2036 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom)
|
|
|
2037 {
|
|
|
2038 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2039 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
2040 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
2041 # else
|
|
|
2042 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
2043
|
|
|
2044 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
2045 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc);
|
|
|
2046
|
|
|
2047 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
2048 {
|
|
|
2049 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
2050 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
2051 }
|
|
|
2052 # endif
|
|
|
2053 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
2054 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
2055 }
|
|
|
2056 # endif /* FEAT_MBYTE */
|
|
|
2057
|
|
|
2058 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len);
|
|
|
2059 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */
|
|
|
2060 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2061 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
2062 # endif
|
|
|
2063
|
|
|
2064 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
2065 dropkey[2] |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT;
|
|
|
2066 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
2067 dropkey[2] |= MOD_MASK_CTRL;
|
|
|
2068 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
2069 dropkey[2] |= MOD_MASK_ALT;
|
|
|
2070
|
|
|
2071 if (dropkey[2] != 0)
|
|
|
2072 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey));
|
|
|
2073 else
|
|
|
2074 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3));
|
|
|
2075
|
|
|
2076 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
2077 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
2078 }
|
|
|
2079
|
|
|
2080 /*
|
|
|
2081 * DND receiver.
|
|
|
2082 */
|
|
|
2083 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
2084 static void
|
|
|
2085 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2086 GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2087 gint x,
|
|
|
2088 gint y,
|
|
|
2089 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2090 guint info,
|
|
|
2091 guint time_,
|
|
|
2092 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
2093 {
|
|
|
2094 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
2095
|
|
|
2096 /* Guard against trash */
|
|
|
2097 if (data->data == NULL
|
|
|
2098 || data->length <= 0
|
|
|
2099 || data->format != 8
|
|
|
2100 || data->data[data->length] != '\0')
|
|
|
2101 {
|
|
|
2102 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_);
|
|
|
2103 return;
|
|
|
2104 }
|
|
|
2105
|
|
|
2106 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between
|
|
|
2107 * different operations later. */
|
|
|
2108 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state);
|
|
|
2109
|
|
|
2110 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */
|
|
|
2111 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST)
|
|
|
2112 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y);
|
|
|
2113 else
|
|
|
2114 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state);
|
|
|
2115
|
|
|
2116 }
|
|
|
2117 #endif /* FEAT_DND */
|
|
|
2118
|
|
|
2119
|
|
|
2120 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
2121 /*
|
|
|
2122 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot
|
|
|
2123 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if
|
|
|
2124 * necessary.
|
|
|
2125 */
|
|
|
2126 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2127 static void
|
|
|
2128 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client,
|
|
|
2129 gint key,
|
|
|
2130 GnomeDialogType type,
|
|
|
2131 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2132 {
|
|
|
2133 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod;
|
|
|
2134 gboolean shutdown_cancelled;
|
|
|
2135
|
|
|
2136 save_cmdmod = cmdmod;
|
|
|
2137
|
|
|
2138 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE
|
|
|
2139 cmdmod.browse = TRUE;
|
|
|
2140 # endif
|
|
|
2141 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG)
|
|
|
2142 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE;
|
|
|
2143 # endif
|
|
|
2144 /*
|
|
|
2145 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with
|
|
|
2146 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message.
|
|
|
2147 */
|
|
|
2148 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE);
|
|
|
2149
|
|
|
2150 exiting = FALSE;
|
|
|
2151 cmdmod = save_cmdmod;
|
|
|
2152 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */
|
|
|
2153 out_flush();
|
|
|
2154 /*
|
|
|
2155 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown
|
|
|
2156 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (:
|
|
|
2157 */
|
|
|
2158 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled);
|
|
|
2159 }
|
|
|
2160
|
|
|
2161 /*
|
|
|
2162 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session.
|
|
|
2163 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make
|
|
|
2164 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success.
|
|
|
2165 */
|
|
|
2166 static int
|
|
|
2167 write_session_file(char_u *filename)
|
|
|
2168 {
|
|
|
2169 char_u *escaped_filename;
|
|
|
2170 char *mksession_cmdline;
|
|
|
2171 unsigned int save_ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2172 int failed;
|
|
|
2173
|
|
|
2174 /*
|
|
|
2175 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current
|
|
|
2176 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises.
|
|
|
2177 */
|
|
|
2178 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars);
|
|
|
2179 if (escaped_filename == NULL)
|
|
|
2180 return FALSE;
|
|
|
2181 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename, NULL);
|
|
|
2182 vim_free(escaped_filename);
|
|
|
2183 /*
|
|
|
2184 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid
|
|
|
2185 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also,
|
|
|
2186 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session.
|
|
|
2187 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming
|
|
|
2188 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly.
|
|
|
2189 */
|
|
|
2190 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2191 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS
|
|
|
2192 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE);
|
|
|
2193
|
|
|
2194 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session");
|
|
|
2195 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL);
|
|
|
2196 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session");
|
|
|
2197 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session");
|
|
|
2198
|
|
|
2199 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2200 g_free(mksession_cmdline);
|
|
|
2201 /*
|
|
|
2202 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session,
|
|
|
2203 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with
|
|
|
2204 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add
|
|
|
2205 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram.
|
|
|
2206 */
|
|
|
2207 if (!failed)
|
|
|
2208 {
|
|
|
2209 FILE *fd;
|
|
|
2210
|
|
|
2211 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN);
|
|
|
2212
|
|
|
2213 failed = (fd == NULL
|
|
|
2214 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL
|
|
|
2215 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL);
|
|
|
2216
|
|
|
2217 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0)
|
|
|
2218 failed = TRUE;
|
|
|
2219
|
|
|
2220 if (failed)
|
|
|
2221 mch_remove(filename);
|
|
|
2222 }
|
|
|
2223
|
|
|
2224 return !failed;
|
|
|
2225 }
|
|
|
2226
|
|
|
2227 /*
|
|
|
2228 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user
|
|
|
2229 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell
|
|
|
2230 * the session manager how to restart Vim.
|
|
|
2231 */
|
|
|
2232 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2233 static gboolean
|
|
|
2234 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client,
|
|
|
2235 gint phase,
|
|
|
2236 GnomeSaveStyle save_style,
|
|
|
2237 gboolean shutdown,
|
|
|
2238 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style,
|
|
|
2239 gboolean fast,
|
|
|
2240 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2241 {
|
|
|
2242 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim";
|
|
|
2243 char *session_file;
|
|
|
2244 unsigned int len;
|
|
|
2245 gboolean success;
|
|
|
2246
|
|
|
2247 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any()
|
|
|
2248 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified.
|
|
|
2249 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without
|
|
|
2250 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */
|
|
|
2251 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY)
|
|
|
2252 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL,
|
|
|
2253 &sm_client_check_changed_any,
|
|
|
2254 NULL);
|
|
|
2255 out_flush();
|
|
|
2256 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2257
|
|
|
2258 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care
|
|
|
2259 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in
|
|
|
2260 * the domain of the session manager. */
|
|
|
2261 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path(
|
|
|
2262 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client));
|
|
|
2263 len = strlen(session_file);
|
|
|
2264
|
|
|
2265 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR)
|
|
|
2266 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */
|
|
|
2267
|
|
|
2268 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix));
|
|
|
2269 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix));
|
|
|
2270
|
|
|
2271 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file);
|
|
|
2272
|
|
|
2273 if (success)
|
|
|
2274 {
|
|
|
2275 const char *argv[8];
|
|
|
2276 int i;
|
|
|
2277
|
|
|
2278 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data.
|
|
|
2279 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file
|
|
|
2280 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like
|
|
|
2281 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */
|
|
|
2282 i = 0;
|
|
|
2283 argv[i++] = "rm";
|
|
|
2284 argv[i++] = session_file;
|
|
|
2285 argv[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
2286
|
|
|
2287 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv);
|
|
|
2288
|
|
|
2289 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session.
|
|
|
2290 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag
|
|
|
2291 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion.
|
|
|
2292 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on.
|
|
|
2293 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */
|
|
|
2294 i = 0;
|
|
|
2295 argv[i++] = restart_command;
|
|
|
2296 argv[i++] = "-f";
|
|
|
2297 argv[i++] = "-g";
|
|
|
2298 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2299 argv[i++] = "--role";
|
|
|
2300 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
2301 # endif
|
|
|
2302 argv[i++] = "-S";
|
|
|
2303 argv[i++] = session_file;
|
|
|
2304 argv[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
2305
|
|
|
2306 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv);
|
|
|
2307 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL);
|
|
|
2308 }
|
|
|
2309
|
|
|
2310 g_free(session_file);
|
|
|
2311
|
|
|
2312 return success;
|
|
|
2313 }
|
|
|
2314
|
|
|
2315 /*
|
|
|
2316 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save
|
|
|
2317 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble
|
|
|
2318 * is happening).
|
|
|
2319 */
|
|
|
2320 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2321 static void
|
|
|
2322 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2323 {
|
|
|
2324 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
2325 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
2326
|
|
|
2327 STRNCPY(IObuff, _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"),
|
|
|
2328 IOSIZE);
|
|
|
2329 IObuff[IOSIZE - 1] = NUL;
|
|
|
2330 preserve_exit();
|
|
|
2331 }
|
|
|
2332
|
|
|
2333 /*
|
|
|
2334 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown.
|
|
|
2335 */
|
|
|
2336 static void
|
|
|
2337 setup_save_yourself(void)
|
|
|
2338 {
|
|
|
2339 GnomeClient *client;
|
|
|
2340
|
|
|
2341 client = gnome_master_client();
|
|
|
2342
|
|
|
2343 if (client != NULL)
|
|
|
2344 {
|
|
|
2345 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility
|
|
|
2346 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */
|
|
|
2347 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself",
|
|
|
2348 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL);
|
|
|
2349 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die",
|
|
|
2350 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL);
|
|
|
2351 }
|
|
|
2352 }
|
|
|
2353
|
|
|
2354 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */
|
|
|
2355
|
|
|
2356 # ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
2357 /*
|
|
|
2358 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention
|
|
|
2359 */
|
|
|
2360 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
2361 static gboolean
|
|
|
2362 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data)
|
|
|
2363 GIOChannel *source;
|
|
|
2364 GIOCondition condition;
|
|
|
2365 gpointer data;
|
|
|
2366 {
|
|
|
2367 if (condition == G_IO_IN)
|
|
|
2368 {
|
|
|
2369 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */
|
|
|
2370 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL)
|
|
|
2371 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data);
|
|
|
2372 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2373 }
|
|
|
2374 /* Error */
|
|
|
2375 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data);
|
|
|
2376 xsmp_close();
|
|
|
2377 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2378 }
|
|
|
2379 # endif /* USE_XSMP */
|
|
|
2380
|
|
|
2381 /*
|
|
|
2382 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event.
|
|
|
2383 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative.
|
|
|
2384 */
|
|
|
2385 static void
|
|
|
2386 setup_save_yourself(void)
|
|
|
2387 {
|
|
|
2388 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL;
|
|
|
2389 int count = 0;
|
|
|
2390
|
|
|
2391 #ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
2392 if (xsmp_icefd != -1)
|
|
|
2393 {
|
|
|
2394 /*
|
|
|
2395 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF;
|
|
|
2396 * set up GTK IO monitor
|
|
|
2397 */
|
|
|
2398 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd);
|
|
|
2399
|
|
|
2400 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP,
|
|
|
2401 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io);
|
|
|
2402 }
|
|
|
2403 else
|
|
|
2404 #endif
|
|
|
2405 {
|
|
|
2406 /* Fall back to old method */
|
|
|
2407
|
|
|
2408 /* first get the existing value */
|
|
|
2409 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2410 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2411 &existing_atoms, &count))
|
|
|
2412 {
|
|
|
2413 Atom *new_atoms;
|
|
|
2414 Atom save_yourself_xatom;
|
|
|
2415 int i;
|
|
|
2416
|
|
|
2417 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom);
|
|
|
2418
|
|
|
2419 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */
|
|
|
2420 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
2421 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom)
|
|
|
2422 break;
|
|
|
2423
|
|
|
2424 if (i == count)
|
|
|
2425 {
|
|
|
2426 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */
|
|
|
2427 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1)
|
|
|
2428 * sizeof(Atom)));
|
|
|
2429 if (new_atoms != NULL)
|
|
|
2430 {
|
|
|
2431 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom));
|
|
|
2432 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom;
|
|
|
2433 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2434 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2435 new_atoms, count + 1);
|
|
|
2436 vim_free(new_atoms);
|
|
|
2437 }
|
|
|
2438 }
|
|
|
2439 XFree(existing_atoms);
|
|
|
2440 }
|
|
|
2441 }
|
|
|
2442 }
|
|
|
2443
|
|
|
2444 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2445 /*
|
|
|
2446 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch
|
|
|
2447 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own
|
|
|
2448 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying
|
|
|
2449 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead
|
|
|
2450 * (This is what we did for GTK+ 1.2, see below).
|
|
|
2451 *
|
|
|
2452 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never
|
|
|
2453 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly.
|
|
|
2454 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this
|
|
|
2455 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people.
|
|
|
2456 *
|
|
|
2457 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly
|
|
|
2458 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes,
|
|
|
2459 * it should work with KDE as well.
|
|
|
2460 */
|
|
|
2461 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2462 static GdkFilterReturn
|
|
|
2463 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2464 {
|
|
|
2465 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev;
|
|
|
2466
|
|
|
2467 if (xevent != NULL
|
|
|
2468 && xevent->type == ClientMessage
|
|
|
2469 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom)
|
|
|
2470 && xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom))
|
|
|
2471 {
|
|
|
2472 out_flush();
|
|
|
2473 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2474 /*
|
|
|
2475 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager
|
|
|
2476 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be
|
|
|
2477 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL.
|
|
|
2478 */
|
|
|
2479 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2480 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2481 NULL, 0);
|
|
|
2482 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE;
|
|
|
2483 }
|
|
|
2484
|
|
|
2485 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE;
|
|
|
2486 }
|
|
|
2487
|
|
|
2488 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2489
|
|
|
2490 /*
|
|
|
2491 * GDK handler for X ClientMessage events.
|
|
|
2492 */
|
|
|
2493 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
2494 static GdkFilterReturn
|
|
|
2495 gdk_wm_protocols_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2496 {
|
|
|
2497 /* From example in gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter */
|
|
|
2498 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev;
|
|
|
2499
|
|
|
2500 if (xevent != NULL)
|
|
|
2501 {
|
|
|
2502 if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom))
|
|
|
2503 {
|
|
|
2504 out_flush();
|
|
|
2505 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2506
|
|
|
2507 /* Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager
|
|
|
2508 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be
|
|
|
2509 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. */
|
|
|
2510 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2511 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2512 NULL, 0);
|
|
|
2513 }
|
|
|
2514 /*
|
|
|
2515 * Functionality from gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter;
|
|
|
2516 * Registering this filter apparently overrides the default GDK one,
|
|
|
2517 * so we need to perform its functionality. There seems no way to
|
|
|
2518 * register for WM_PROTOCOLS, and only process the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF
|
|
|
2519 * bit; it's all or nothing. Update: No, there is a way -- but it
|
|
|
2520 * only works with GTK+ 2 apparently. See above.
|
|
|
2521 */
|
|
|
2522 else if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(gdk_wm_delete_window))
|
|
|
2523 {
|
|
|
2524 event->any.type = GDK_DELETE;
|
|
|
2525 return GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE;
|
|
|
2526 }
|
|
|
2527 }
|
|
|
2528
|
|
|
2529 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE;
|
|
|
2530 }
|
|
|
2531 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2532
|
|
|
2533 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */
|
|
|
2534
|
|
|
2535
|
|
|
2536 /*
|
|
|
2537 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized.
|
|
|
2538 */
|
|
|
2539 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
2540 static void
|
|
|
2541 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2542 {
|
|
|
2543 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime
|
|
|
2544 * archive! */
|
|
|
2545 #ifdef magick
|
|
|
2546 # undef magick
|
|
|
2547 #endif
|
|
|
2548 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2549 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */
|
|
|
2550 # define static static const
|
|
|
2551 #endif
|
|
|
2552 #define magick vim32x32
|
|
|
2553 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm"
|
|
|
2554 #undef magick
|
|
|
2555 #define magick vim16x16
|
|
|
2556 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm"
|
|
|
2557 #undef magick
|
|
|
2558 #define magick vim48x48
|
|
|
2559 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm"
|
|
|
2560 #undef magick
|
|
|
2561 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2562 # undef static
|
|
|
2563 #endif
|
|
|
2564
|
|
|
2565 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */
|
|
|
2566 if (echo_wid_arg)
|
|
|
2567 {
|
|
|
2568 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window));
|
|
|
2569 fflush(stdout);
|
|
|
2570 }
|
|
|
2571
|
|
|
2572 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL)
|
|
|
2573 {
|
|
|
2574 /*
|
|
|
2575 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user.
|
|
|
2576 */
|
|
|
2577 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2578 GList *icons = NULL;
|
|
|
2579
|
|
|
2580 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16));
|
|
|
2581 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32));
|
|
|
2582 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48));
|
|
|
2583
|
|
|
2584 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons);
|
|
|
2585
|
|
|
2586 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL);
|
|
|
2587 g_list_free(icons);
|
|
|
2588
|
|
|
2589 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2590
|
|
|
2591 GdkPixmap *icon;
|
|
|
2592 GdkBitmap *icon_mask = NULL;
|
|
|
2593 char **magick = vim32x32;
|
|
|
2594 Display *xdisplay;
|
|
|
2595 Window root_window;
|
|
|
2596 XIconSize *size;
|
|
|
2597 int number_sizes;
|
|
|
2598 /*
|
|
|
2599 * Adjust the icon to the preferences of the actual window manager.
|
|
|
2600 * This is once again a workaround for a defficiency in GTK+ 1.2.
|
|
|
2601 */
|
|
|
2602 xdisplay = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
2603 root_window = XRootWindow(xdisplay, DefaultScreen(xdisplay));
|
|
|
2604 if (XGetIconSizes(xdisplay, root_window, &size, &number_sizes))
|
|
|
2605 {
|
|
|
2606 if (number_sizes > 0)
|
|
|
2607 {
|
|
|
2608 if (size->max_height >= 48 && size->max_height >= 48)
|
|
|
2609 magick = vim48x48;
|
|
|
2610 else if (size->max_height >= 32 && size->max_height >= 32)
|
|
|
2611 magick = vim32x32;
|
|
|
2612 else if (size->max_height >= 16 && size->max_height >= 16)
|
|
|
2613 magick = vim16x16;
|
|
|
2614 }
|
|
|
2615 XFree(size);
|
|
|
2616 }
|
|
|
2617 icon = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d(gui.mainwin->window,
|
|
|
2618 &icon_mask, NULL, magick);
|
|
|
2619 if (icon != NULL)
|
|
|
2620 /* Note: for some reason gdk_window_set_icon() doesn't acquire
|
|
|
2621 * a reference on the pixmap, thus we _have_ to leak it. */
|
|
|
2622 gdk_window_set_icon(gui.mainwin->window, NULL, icon, icon_mask);
|
|
|
2623
|
|
|
2624 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2625 }
|
|
|
2626
|
|
|
2627 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
2628 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */
|
|
|
2629 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2630 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL);
|
|
|
2631 # else
|
|
|
2632 gdk_add_client_message_filter(wm_protocols_atom,
|
|
|
2633 &gdk_wm_protocols_filter, NULL);
|
|
|
2634 # endif
|
|
|
2635 #endif
|
|
|
2636 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the
|
|
|
2637 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session
|
|
|
2638 * manager instead. */
|
|
|
2639 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
2640 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
2641 #endif
|
|
|
2642 setup_save_yourself();
|
|
|
2643
|
|
|
2644 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER
|
|
|
2645 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL)
|
|
|
2646 {
|
|
|
2647 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */
|
|
|
2648 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
2649
|
|
|
2650 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2651 serverDelayedStartName);
|
|
|
2652 }
|
|
|
2653 else
|
|
|
2654 {
|
|
|
2655 /*
|
|
|
2656 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll
|
|
|
2657 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window
|
|
|
2658 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window
|
|
|
2659 */
|
|
|
2660 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2661 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window));
|
|
|
2662 }
|
|
|
2663 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK);
|
|
|
2664 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event",
|
|
|
2665 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL);
|
|
|
2666 #endif
|
|
|
2667 }
|
|
|
2668
|
|
|
2669 static GdkCursor *
|
|
|
2670 create_blank_pointer(void)
|
|
|
2671 {
|
|
|
2672 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL;
|
|
|
2673 GdkPixmap *blank_mask;
|
|
|
2674 GdkCursor *cursor;
|
|
|
2675 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
|
2676 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 };
|
|
|
2677
|
|
|
2678 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2679 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
2680 #endif
|
|
|
2681
|
|
|
2682 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel
|
|
|
2683 * in size. */
|
|
|
2684 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1);
|
|
|
2685 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask,
|
|
|
2686 &color, &color, 0, 0);
|
|
|
2687 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask);
|
|
|
2688
|
|
|
2689 return cursor;
|
|
|
2690 }
|
|
|
2691
|
|
|
2692 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2693 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2694 static void
|
|
|
2695 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2696 GdkScreen *previous_screen,
|
|
|
2697 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2698 {
|
|
|
2699 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget))
|
|
|
2700 return;
|
|
|
2701
|
|
|
2702 /*
|
|
|
2703 * Recreate the invisble mouse cursor.
|
|
|
2704 */
|
|
|
2705 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL)
|
|
|
2706 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2707
|
|
|
2708 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer();
|
|
|
2709
|
|
|
2710 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
2711 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2712
|
|
|
2713 /*
|
|
|
2714 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it
|
|
|
2715 * with the current font if necessary.
|
|
|
2716 */
|
|
|
2717 if (gui.text_context != NULL)
|
|
|
2718 g_object_unref(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
2719
|
|
|
2720 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget);
|
|
|
2721 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR);
|
|
|
2722
|
|
|
2723 if (gui.norm_font != NULL)
|
|
|
2724 {
|
|
38
|
2725 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE);
|
|
7
|
2726 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE);
|
|
|
2727 }
|
|
|
2728 }
|
|
|
2729 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */
|
|
|
2730
|
|
|
2731 /*
|
|
|
2732 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the
|
|
|
2733 * dummy blank cursor.
|
|
|
2734 *
|
|
|
2735 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the
|
|
|
2736 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere.
|
|
|
2737 */
|
|
|
2738 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2739 static void
|
|
|
2740 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2741 {
|
|
|
2742 GtkWidget *sbar;
|
|
|
2743
|
|
|
2744 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
2745 xim_init();
|
|
|
2746 #endif
|
|
|
2747 gui_mch_new_colors();
|
|
|
2748 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
2749
|
|
|
2750 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer();
|
|
|
2751 if (gui.pointer_hidden)
|
|
|
2752 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2753
|
|
|
2754 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */
|
|
|
2755 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id;
|
|
|
2756 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]
|
|
|
2757 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id))
|
|
|
2758 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id;
|
|
|
2759 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width)
|
|
|
2760 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width;
|
|
|
2761
|
|
|
2762 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id;
|
|
|
2763 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height)
|
|
|
2764 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height;
|
|
|
2765 }
|
|
|
2766
|
|
|
2767 /*
|
|
|
2768 * Properly clean up on shutdown.
|
|
|
2769 */
|
|
|
2770 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2771 static void
|
|
|
2772 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2773 {
|
|
|
2774 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
2775 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
2776
|
|
|
2777 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
2778 im_shutdown();
|
|
|
2779 #endif
|
|
|
2780 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2781 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
2782 {
|
|
|
2783 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
2784 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL;
|
|
|
2785 }
|
|
|
2786 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL)
|
|
|
2787 {
|
|
|
2788 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
2789 gui.ascii_font = NULL;
|
|
|
2790 }
|
|
|
2791 g_object_unref(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
2792 gui.text_context = NULL;
|
|
|
2793
|
|
|
2794 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc);
|
|
|
2795 gui.text_gc = NULL;
|
|
|
2796
|
|
|
2797 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2798 gui.blank_pointer = NULL;
|
|
|
2799 #else
|
|
|
2800 gdk_gc_unref(gui.text_gc);
|
|
|
2801 gui.text_gc = NULL;
|
|
|
2802
|
|
|
2803 gdk_cursor_destroy(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2804 gui.blank_pointer = NULL;
|
|
|
2805 #endif
|
|
|
2806 }
|
|
|
2807
|
|
|
2808 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2809 static void
|
|
|
2810 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2811 GtkStyle *previous_style,
|
|
|
2812 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2813 {
|
|
|
2814 gui_mch_new_colors();
|
|
|
2815 }
|
|
|
2816
|
|
|
2817 /*
|
|
|
2818 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window.
|
|
|
2819 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers.
|
|
|
2820 */
|
|
|
2821 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
2822 static gint
|
|
|
2823 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventAny *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2824 {
|
|
|
2825 gui_shell_closed();
|
|
|
2826 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2827 }
|
|
|
2828
|
|
|
2829 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
2830
|
|
|
2831 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2832 /*
|
|
|
2833 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the
|
|
|
2834 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons
|
|
|
2835 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this.
|
|
|
2836 */
|
|
|
2837 static void
|
|
|
2838 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
2839 {
|
|
|
2840 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget))
|
|
|
2841 {
|
|
|
2842 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget;
|
|
|
2843
|
|
|
2844 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */
|
|
|
2845 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET)
|
|
|
2846 {
|
|
|
2847 GtkIconSet *icon_set;
|
|
|
2848 GtkIconSize icon_size;
|
|
|
2849
|
|
|
2850 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size);
|
|
|
2851 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data;
|
|
|
2852
|
|
|
2853 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set);
|
|
|
2854 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size);
|
|
|
2855 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set);
|
|
|
2856 }
|
|
|
2857 }
|
|
|
2858 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget))
|
|
|
2859 {
|
|
|
2860 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget,
|
|
|
2861 &icon_size_changed_foreach,
|
|
|
2862 user_data);
|
|
|
2863 }
|
|
|
2864 }
|
|
|
2865 # endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2866
|
|
|
2867 static void
|
|
|
2868 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar)
|
|
|
2869 {
|
|
|
2870 GtkToolbarStyle style;
|
|
|
2871 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2872 GtkIconSize size;
|
|
|
2873 GtkIconSize oldsize;
|
|
|
2874 # endif
|
|
|
2875
|
|
|
2876 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2877 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ))
|
|
|
2878 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ))
|
|
|
2879 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ;
|
|
|
2880 else
|
|
|
2881 # endif
|
|
|
2882 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))
|
|
|
2883 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))
|
|
|
2884 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH;
|
|
|
2885 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT)
|
|
|
2886 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT;
|
|
|
2887 else
|
|
|
2888 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS;
|
|
|
2889
|
|
|
2890 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style);
|
|
|
2891 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0);
|
|
|
2892
|
|
|
2893 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2894 switch (tbis_flags)
|
|
|
2895 {
|
|
|
2896 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break;
|
|
|
2897 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break;
|
|
|
2898 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break;
|
|
|
2899 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break;
|
|
|
2900 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break;
|
|
|
2901 }
|
|
|
2902 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
2903
|
|
|
2904 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID)
|
|
|
2905 {
|
|
|
2906 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */
|
|
|
2907 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
2908 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
2909 }
|
|
|
2910 if (size != oldsize)
|
|
|
2911 {
|
|
|
2912 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar),
|
|
|
2913 &icon_size_changed_foreach,
|
|
|
2914 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size));
|
|
|
2915 }
|
|
|
2916 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size);
|
|
|
2917 # endif
|
|
|
2918 }
|
|
|
2919
|
|
|
2920 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
2921
|
|
|
2922 /*
|
|
|
2923 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc.
|
|
|
2924 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started.
|
|
|
2925 */
|
|
|
2926 int
|
|
|
2927 gui_mch_init(void)
|
|
|
2928 {
|
|
|
2929 GtkWidget *vbox;
|
|
|
2930
|
|
|
2931 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
2932 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init()
|
|
|
2933 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called
|
|
|
2934 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */
|
|
|
2935 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
2936 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2937 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT,
|
|
|
2938 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL);
|
|
|
2939 # else
|
|
|
2940 gnome_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, gui_argc, gui_argv);
|
|
|
2941 # endif
|
|
|
2942 #endif
|
|
|
2943 vim_free(gui_argv);
|
|
|
2944 gui_argv = NULL;
|
|
|
2945
|
|
|
2946 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2947 # if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3)
|
|
|
2948 /* Set the human-readable application name */
|
|
|
2949 g_set_application_name("Vim");
|
|
|
2950 # endif
|
|
|
2951 /*
|
|
|
2952 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is.
|
|
|
2953 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding'
|
|
|
2954 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use.
|
|
|
2955 */
|
|
|
2956 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0);
|
|
|
2957
|
|
|
2958 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
2959 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons();
|
|
|
2960 # endif
|
|
|
2961 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file.
|
|
|
2962 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */
|
|
|
2963 # if 0
|
|
|
2964 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc");
|
|
|
2965 # endif
|
|
|
2966 #endif
|
|
|
2967
|
|
|
2968 /* Initialize values */
|
|
|
2969 gui.border_width = 2;
|
|
|
2970 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH;
|
|
|
2971 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH;
|
|
|
2972 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
|
2973 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
|
2974
|
|
|
2975 /* Initialise atoms */
|
|
|
2976 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2977 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE);
|
|
|
2978 #endif
|
|
|
2979 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2980 compound_text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("COMPOUND_TEXT", FALSE);
|
|
|
2981 text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("TEXT", FALSE);
|
|
|
2982 #endif
|
|
|
2983
|
|
|
2984 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */
|
|
|
2985 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel;
|
|
|
2986 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel;
|
|
|
2987
|
|
|
2988 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
2989 {
|
|
|
2990 GtkWidget *plug;
|
|
|
2991
|
|
|
2992 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */
|
|
|
2993 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2994 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(),
|
|
|
2995 gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
2996 #else
|
|
|
2997 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
2998 #endif
|
|
|
2999 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL)
|
|
|
3000 {
|
|
|
3001 gui.mainwin = plug;
|
|
|
3002 }
|
|
|
3003 else
|
|
|
3004 {
|
|
|
3005 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed",
|
|
|
3006 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3007 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */
|
|
|
3008 gtk_socket_id = 0;
|
|
|
3009 }
|
|
|
3010 }
|
|
|
3011
|
|
|
3012 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3013 {
|
|
|
3014 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3015 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3016 {
|
|
|
3017 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL);
|
|
|
3018 # ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
3019 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */
|
|
|
3020 xsmp_close();
|
|
|
3021 # endif
|
|
|
3022 }
|
|
|
3023 else
|
|
|
3024 #endif
|
|
|
3025 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
|
|
|
3026 }
|
|
|
3027
|
|
|
3028 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window");
|
|
|
3029
|
|
|
3030 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3031 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */
|
|
|
3032 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
3033 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR);
|
|
|
3034 #endif
|
|
|
3035
|
|
|
3036 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3037 gtk_window_set_policy(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE);
|
|
|
3038 #endif
|
|
|
3039 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0);
|
|
|
3040 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK);
|
|
|
3041
|
|
|
3042 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event",
|
|
|
3043 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3044
|
|
|
3045 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize",
|
|
|
3046 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL);
|
|
|
3047 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
3048 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed",
|
|
|
3049 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3050 #endif
|
|
|
3051 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3052 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new();
|
|
|
3053 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group);
|
|
|
3054 #else
|
|
|
3055 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_get_default();
|
|
|
3056 #endif
|
|
|
3057
|
|
|
3058 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3059
|
|
|
3060 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3061 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3062 {
|
|
|
3063 # if defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
3064 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */
|
|
|
3065 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE);
|
|
|
3066 # endif
|
|
|
3067 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox);
|
|
|
3068 }
|
|
|
3069 else
|
|
|
3070 #endif
|
|
|
3071 {
|
|
|
3072 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox);
|
|
|
3073 gtk_widget_show(vbox);
|
|
|
3074 }
|
|
|
3075
|
|
|
3076 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
3077 /*
|
|
|
3078 * Create the menubar and handle
|
|
|
3079 */
|
|
|
3080 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
|
|
|
3081 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar");
|
|
|
3082
|
|
36
|
3083 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3084 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */
|
|
|
3085 {
|
|
|
3086 GtkSettings *gtk_settings;
|
|
|
3087
|
|
|
3088 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default());
|
|
|
3089 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
3090 }
|
|
|
3091 # endif
|
|
|
3092
|
|
|
3093
|
|
7
|
3094 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3095 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3096 {
|
|
|
3097 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3098 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3099
|
|
|
3100 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar));
|
|
|
3101 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin),
|
|
|
3102 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME);
|
|
|
3103 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem);
|
|
|
3104 # else
|
|
|
3105 gui.menubar_h = gnome_dock_item_new("VimMainMenu",
|
|
|
3106 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE |
|
|
|
3107 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
3108 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.menubar_h), gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3109
|
|
|
3110 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock),
|
|
|
3111 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(gui.menubar_h),
|
|
|
3112 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */
|
|
|
3113 1, /* band_num */
|
|
|
3114 0, /* band_position */
|
|
|
3115 0, /* offset */
|
|
|
3116 TRUE);
|
|
|
3117 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3118 # endif
|
|
|
3119 }
|
|
|
3120 else
|
|
|
3121 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */
|
|
|
3122 {
|
|
|
3123 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) != NULL)
|
|
|
3124 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3125 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3126 }
|
|
|
3127 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
3128
|
|
|
3129 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3130 /*
|
|
|
3131 * Create the toolbar and handle
|
|
|
3132 */
|
|
|
3133 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3134 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */
|
|
|
3135 gtk_rc_parse_string(
|
|
|
3136 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n"
|
|
|
3137 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n"
|
|
|
3138 "}\n"
|
|
|
3139 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n");
|
|
|
3140 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new();
|
|
|
3141 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar");
|
|
|
3142 # else
|
|
|
3143 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL,
|
|
|
3144 GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS);
|
|
|
3145 gtk_toolbar_set_button_relief(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar), GTK_RELIEF_NONE);
|
|
|
3146 # endif
|
|
|
3147 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3148
|
|
|
3149 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3150 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3151 {
|
|
|
3152 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3153 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3154
|
|
|
3155 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3156 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin),
|
|
|
3157 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME);
|
|
|
3158 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem);
|
|
|
3159 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0);
|
|
|
3160 # else
|
|
|
3161 GtkWidget *dockitem;
|
|
|
3162
|
|
|
3163 dockitem = gnome_dock_item_new("VimToolBar",
|
|
|
3164 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE);
|
|
|
3165 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(dockitem), GTK_WIDGET(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3166 gui.toolbar_h = dockitem;
|
|
|
3167
|
|
|
3168 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock),
|
|
|
3169 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(dockitem),
|
|
|
3170 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */
|
|
|
3171 1, /* band_num */
|
|
|
3172 1, /* band_position */
|
|
|
3173 0, /* offset */
|
|
|
3174 TRUE);
|
|
|
3175 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 2);
|
|
|
3176 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar);
|
|
|
3177 # endif
|
|
|
3178 }
|
|
|
3179 else
|
|
|
3180 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */
|
|
|
3181 {
|
|
|
3182 # ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3183 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 1);
|
|
|
3184 # endif
|
|
|
3185 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL
|
|
|
3186 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)))
|
|
|
3187 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar);
|
|
|
3188 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3189 }
|
|
|
3190 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
3191
|
|
|
3192 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new();
|
|
|
3193 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0);
|
|
|
3194 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK);
|
|
|
3195
|
|
|
3196 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new();
|
|
|
3197
|
|
|
3198 /* Determine which events we will filter. */
|
|
|
3199 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3200 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK |
|
|
|
3201 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK |
|
|
|
3202 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK |
|
|
|
3203 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK |
|
|
|
3204 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK |
|
|
|
3205 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3206 GDK_SCROLL_MASK |
|
|
|
3207 #endif
|
|
|
3208 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK |
|
|
|
3209 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK |
|
|
|
3210 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK |
|
|
|
3211 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK);
|
|
|
3212
|
|
|
3213 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
3214 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0);
|
|
|
3215 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin);
|
|
|
3216 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
|
|
|
3217
|
|
|
3218 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea)
|
|
|
3219 * and not the window. */
|
|
|
3220 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3221 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
3222 "key_press_event",
|
|
|
3223 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3224 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
3225 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input
|
|
|
3226 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */
|
|
|
3227 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3228 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
3229 "key_release_event",
|
|
|
3230 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3231 #endif
|
|
|
3232 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize",
|
|
|
3233 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3234 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize",
|
|
|
3235 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3236
|
|
|
3237 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set",
|
|
|
3238 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3239
|
|
|
3240 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED;
|
|
|
3241
|
|
|
3242 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
3243 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE);
|
|
|
3244 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE);
|
|
|
3245 #endif
|
|
|
3246
|
|
|
3247 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
3248 /* make sure keybord input can go to the drawarea */
|
|
|
3249 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS);
|
|
|
3250
|
|
|
3251 /*
|
|
|
3252 * Set clipboard specific atoms
|
|
|
3253 */
|
|
|
3254 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE);
|
|
|
3255 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
3256 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE);
|
|
|
3257 #endif
|
|
|
3258 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY;
|
|
|
3259 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE);
|
|
|
3260
|
|
|
3261 /*
|
|
|
3262 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset.
|
|
|
3263 */
|
|
|
3264 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width;
|
|
|
3265
|
|
|
3266 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event",
|
|
|
3267 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3268 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event",
|
|
|
3269 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3270
|
|
|
3271 /*
|
|
|
3272 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'.
|
|
|
3273 * Only needed for some window managers.
|
|
|
3274 */
|
|
|
3275 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL)
|
|
|
3276 {
|
|
|
3277 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event",
|
|
|
3278 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3279 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event",
|
|
|
3280 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3281 }
|
|
|
3282
|
|
|
3283 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3284 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3285 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3286 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3287
|
|
|
3288 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event",
|
|
|
3289 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3290 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event",
|
|
|
3291 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3292 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event",
|
|
|
3293 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3294 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3295 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event",
|
|
|
3296 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3297 #endif
|
|
|
3298
|
|
|
3299 /*
|
|
|
3300 * Add selection handler functions.
|
|
|
3301 */
|
|
|
3302 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event",
|
|
|
3303 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3304 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received",
|
|
|
3305 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3306
|
|
|
3307 /*
|
|
|
3308 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections.
|
|
|
3309 */
|
|
|
3310 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3311 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
|
|
|
3312 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS);
|
|
|
3313 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3314 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom,
|
|
|
3315 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS);
|
|
|
3316
|
|
|
3317 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get",
|
|
|
3318 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3319
|
|
|
3320 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */
|
|
|
3321 gui.in_focus = FALSE;
|
|
|
3322
|
|
|
3323 return OK;
|
|
|
3324 }
|
|
|
3325
|
|
|
3326 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3327 /*
|
|
|
3328 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done.
|
|
|
3329 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID.
|
|
|
3330 */
|
|
|
3331 void
|
|
|
3332 gui_mch_forked(void)
|
|
|
3333 {
|
|
|
3334 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3335 {
|
|
|
3336 GnomeClient *client;
|
|
|
3337
|
|
|
3338 client = gnome_master_client();
|
|
|
3339
|
|
|
3340 if (client != NULL)
|
|
|
3341 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid());
|
|
|
3342 }
|
|
|
3343 }
|
|
|
3344 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */
|
|
|
3345
|
|
|
3346 /*
|
|
|
3347 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed.
|
|
|
3348 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are
|
|
|
3349 * currently manipulating them where desired.
|
|
|
3350 */
|
|
|
3351 void
|
|
|
3352 gui_mch_new_colors(void)
|
|
|
3353 {
|
|
|
3354 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
3355 {
|
|
|
3356 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
|
3357
|
|
|
3358 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
3359 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color);
|
|
|
3360 }
|
|
|
3361 }
|
|
|
3362
|
|
|
3363 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR)
|
|
|
3364 static int
|
|
|
3365 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation)
|
|
|
3366 {
|
|
|
3367 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL;
|
|
|
3368
|
|
|
3369 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3370 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL)
|
|
|
3371 {
|
|
|
3372 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3373 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3374
|
|
|
3375 widget = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget);
|
|
|
3376 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget);
|
|
|
3377
|
|
|
3378 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating)
|
|
|
3379 return 0;
|
|
|
3380 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem);
|
|
|
3381 # else
|
|
|
3382 GnomeDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3383
|
|
|
3384 widget = widget->parent;
|
|
|
3385 dockitem = GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(widget);
|
|
|
3386
|
|
|
3387 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating)
|
|
|
3388 return 0;
|
|
|
3389 item_orientation = gnome_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem);
|
|
|
3390 # endif
|
|
|
3391 }
|
|
|
3392 #endif
|
|
|
3393 if (widget != NULL
|
|
|
3394 && item_orientation == orientation
|
|
|
3395 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget)
|
|
|
3396 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
3397 {
|
|
|
3398 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL)
|
|
|
3399 return widget->allocation.height;
|
|
|
3400 else
|
|
|
3401 return widget->allocation.width;
|
|
|
3402 }
|
|
|
3403 return 0;
|
|
|
3404 }
|
|
|
3405 #endif
|
|
|
3406
|
|
|
3407 static int
|
|
|
3408 get_menu_tool_width(void)
|
|
|
3409 {
|
|
|
3410 int width = 0;
|
|
|
3411
|
|
|
3412 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */
|
|
|
3413 # ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
3414 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
3415 # endif
|
|
|
3416 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3417 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
3418 # endif
|
|
|
3419 #endif
|
|
|
3420
|
|
|
3421 return width;
|
|
|
3422 }
|
|
|
3423
|
|
|
3424 static int
|
|
|
3425 get_menu_tool_height(void)
|
|
|
3426 {
|
|
|
3427 int height = 0;
|
|
|
3428
|
|
|
3429 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
3430 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
3431 #endif
|
|
|
3432 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3433 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
3434 #endif
|
|
|
3435
|
|
|
3436 return height;
|
|
|
3437 }
|
|
|
3438
|
|
|
3439 static void
|
|
|
3440 update_window_manager_hints(void)
|
|
|
3441 {
|
|
|
3442 static int old_width = 0;
|
|
|
3443 static int old_height = 0;
|
|
|
3444 static int old_char_width = 0;
|
|
|
3445 static int old_char_height = 0;
|
|
|
3446
|
|
|
3447 int width;
|
|
|
3448 int height;
|
|
|
3449
|
|
|
3450 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet,
|
|
|
3451 * otherwise the hints don't work. */
|
|
|
3452 width = gui_get_base_width();
|
|
|
3453 height = gui_get_base_height();
|
|
|
3454 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3455 width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
3456 height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
3457 # endif
|
|
|
3458
|
|
|
3459 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */
|
|
|
3460 if (width != old_width
|
|
|
3461 || height != old_height
|
|
|
3462 || gui.char_width != old_char_width
|
|
|
3463 || gui.char_height != old_char_height)
|
|
|
3464 {
|
|
|
3465 GdkGeometry geometry;
|
|
|
3466 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask;
|
|
|
3467
|
|
|
3468 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3469 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
3470 geometry.base_width = width;
|
|
|
3471 geometry.base_height = height;
|
|
|
3472 geometry.min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3473 geometry.min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height;
|
|
|
3474 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC
|
|
|
3475 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE;
|
|
|
3476 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3477 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected
|
|
|
3478 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks
|
|
|
3479 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */
|
|
|
3480 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin,
|
|
|
3481 &geometry, geometry_mask);
|
|
|
3482 # else
|
|
|
3483 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.formwin,
|
|
|
3484 &geometry, geometry_mask);
|
|
|
3485 # endif
|
|
|
3486 old_width = width;
|
|
|
3487 old_height = height;
|
|
|
3488 old_char_width = gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3489 old_char_height = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
3490 }
|
|
|
3491 }
|
|
|
3492
|
|
|
3493 /*
|
|
|
3494 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets.
|
|
|
3495 */
|
|
|
3496 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3497 static gint
|
|
|
3498 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventConfigure *event,
|
|
|
3499 gpointer data)
|
|
|
3500 {
|
|
|
3501 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin));
|
|
|
3502 gui_resize_shell(event->width, event->height);
|
|
|
3503 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin));
|
|
|
3504
|
|
|
3505 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3506 }
|
|
|
3507
|
|
|
3508 /*
|
|
|
3509 * Function called when window already closed.
|
|
|
3510 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done,
|
|
|
3511 * since the window is already inevitably going away.
|
|
|
3512 */
|
|
|
3513 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
3514 static void
|
|
|
3515 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object, gpointer data)
|
|
|
3516 {
|
|
|
3517 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
3518 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
3519
|
|
|
3520 gui.mainwin = NULL;
|
|
|
3521 gui.drawarea = NULL;
|
|
|
3522
|
|
|
3523 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */
|
|
|
3524 {
|
|
|
3525 STRNCPY(IObuff, _("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"),
|
|
|
3526 IOSIZE);
|
|
|
3527 IObuff[IOSIZE - 1] = NUL;
|
|
|
3528 preserve_exit();
|
|
|
3529 }
|
|
|
3530 }
|
|
|
3531
|
|
|
3532 /*
|
|
|
3533 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init().
|
|
|
3534 */
|
|
|
3535 int
|
|
|
3536 gui_mch_open(void)
|
|
|
3537 {
|
|
|
3538 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
3539 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
3540
|
|
|
3541 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3542 /*
|
|
|
3543 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one
|
|
|
3544 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session
|
|
|
3545 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement.
|
|
|
3546 */
|
|
|
3547 if (role_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
3548 {
|
|
|
3549 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument);
|
|
|
3550 }
|
|
|
3551 else
|
|
|
3552 {
|
|
|
3553 char *role;
|
|
|
3554
|
|
|
3555 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */
|
|
|
3556 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u",
|
|
|
3557 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(),
|
|
|
3558 (unsigned)g_random_int(),
|
|
|
3559 (unsigned)time(NULL));
|
|
|
3560
|
|
|
3561 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role);
|
|
|
3562 g_free(role);
|
|
|
3563 }
|
|
|
3564 #endif
|
|
|
3565
|
|
|
3566 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1)
|
|
|
3567 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3568 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y);
|
|
|
3569 #else
|
|
|
3570 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, gui_win_x, gui_win_y);
|
|
|
3571 #endif
|
|
|
3572
|
|
|
3573 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */
|
|
|
3574 if (gui.geom != NULL)
|
|
|
3575 {
|
|
|
3576 int mask;
|
|
|
3577 unsigned int w, h;
|
|
|
3578 int x = 0;
|
|
|
3579 int y = 0;
|
|
|
3580
|
|
|
3581 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h);
|
|
|
3582
|
|
|
3583 if (mask & WidthValue)
|
|
|
3584 Columns = w;
|
|
|
3585 if (mask & HeightValue)
|
|
|
3586 Rows = h;
|
|
|
3587 if (mask & (XValue | YValue))
|
|
|
3588 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3589 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
3590 #else
|
|
|
3591 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, x, y);
|
|
|
3592 #endif
|
|
|
3593 vim_free(gui.geom);
|
|
|
3594 gui.geom = NULL;
|
|
|
3595 }
|
|
|
3596
|
|
|
3597 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin),
|
|
|
3598 (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width),
|
|
|
3599 (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height));
|
|
|
3600 update_window_manager_hints();
|
|
|
3601
|
|
|
3602 if (foreground_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
3603 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument);
|
|
|
3604 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR)
|
|
|
3605 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black");
|
|
|
3606
|
|
|
3607 if (background_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
3608 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument);
|
|
|
3609 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR)
|
|
|
3610 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White");
|
|
|
3611
|
|
|
3612 if (found_reverse_arg)
|
|
|
3613 {
|
|
|
3614 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel;
|
|
|
3615 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel;
|
|
|
3616 }
|
|
|
3617 else
|
|
|
3618 {
|
|
|
3619 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel;
|
|
|
3620 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel;
|
|
|
3621 }
|
|
|
3622
|
|
|
3623 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or
|
|
|
3624 * in a vimrc file) */
|
|
|
3625 set_normal_colors();
|
|
|
3626
|
|
|
3627 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */
|
|
|
3628 gui_check_colors();
|
|
|
3629
|
|
|
3630 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have
|
|
|
3631 * changed them). */
|
|
|
3632 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */
|
|
|
3633
|
|
|
3634 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy",
|
|
|
3635 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3636
|
|
|
3637 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN
|
|
|
3638 hangul_keyboard_set();
|
|
|
3639 #endif
|
|
|
3640
|
|
|
3641 /*
|
|
|
3642 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the
|
|
|
3643 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included
|
|
|
3644 * components.
|
|
|
3645 *
|
|
|
3646 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place,
|
|
|
3647 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window
|
|
|
3648 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting
|
|
|
3649 * upon startup.
|
|
|
3650 */
|
|
|
3651 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event",
|
|
|
3652 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3653
|
|
|
3654 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
3655 /*
|
|
|
3656 * Set up for receiving DND items.
|
|
|
3657 */
|
|
|
3658 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3659 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL,
|
|
|
3660 dnd_targets, N_DND_TARGETS,
|
|
|
3661 GDK_ACTION_COPY);
|
|
|
3662
|
|
|
3663 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received",
|
|
|
3664 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3665 #endif
|
|
|
3666
|
|
|
3667 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3668 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show()
|
|
|
3669 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. This is just as one
|
|
|
3670 * would expect it to work, but it's different in GTK+ 1. The funny
|
|
|
3671 * thing is that iconifying after show() _does_ work with GTK+ 1.
|
|
|
3672 * (BTW doing this in the "realize" handler makes no difference.) */
|
|
|
3673 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3674 gui_mch_iconify();
|
|
|
3675 #endif
|
|
|
3676
|
|
|
3677 {
|
|
|
3678 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
3679 unsigned long menu_handler = 0;
|
|
|
3680 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3681 unsigned long tool_handler = 0;
|
|
|
3682 # endif
|
|
|
3683 /*
|
|
|
3684 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a
|
|
|
3685 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just
|
|
|
3686 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's
|
|
|
3687 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead,
|
|
|
3688 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been
|
|
|
3689 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized.
|
|
|
3690 */
|
|
|
3691 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL)
|
|
|
3692 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show",
|
|
|
3693 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide),
|
|
|
3694 NULL);
|
|
|
3695 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3696 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL
|
|
|
3697 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)))
|
|
|
3698 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show",
|
|
|
3699 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide),
|
|
|
3700 NULL);
|
|
|
3701 # endif
|
|
|
3702 #endif
|
|
|
3703 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
3704
|
|
|
3705 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
3706 if (menu_handler != 0)
|
|
|
3707 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler);
|
|
|
3708 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3709 if (tool_handler != 0)
|
|
|
3710 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler);
|
|
|
3711 # endif
|
|
|
3712 #endif
|
|
|
3713 }
|
|
|
3714
|
|
|
3715 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3716 /* With GTK+ 1, we need to iconify the window after calling show().
|
|
|
3717 * See the comment above for details. */
|
|
|
3718 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3719 gui_mch_iconify();
|
|
|
3720 #endif
|
|
|
3721
|
|
|
3722 return OK;
|
|
|
3723 }
|
|
|
3724
|
|
|
3725
|
|
|
3726 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
3727 void
|
|
|
3728 gui_mch_exit(int rc)
|
|
|
3729 {
|
|
|
3730 if (gui.mainwin != NULL)
|
|
|
3731 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
3732
|
|
|
3733 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
3734 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3735 }
|
|
|
3736
|
|
|
3737 /*
|
|
|
3738 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window.
|
|
|
3739 */
|
|
|
3740 int
|
|
|
3741 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y)
|
|
|
3742 {
|
|
|
3743 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3744 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
3745 #else
|
|
|
3746 /* For some people this must be gdk_window_get_origin() for a correct
|
|
|
3747 * result. Where is the documentation! */
|
|
|
3748 gdk_window_get_root_origin(gui.mainwin->window, x, y);
|
|
|
3749 #endif
|
|
|
3750 return OK;
|
|
|
3751 }
|
|
|
3752
|
|
|
3753 /*
|
|
|
3754 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given
|
|
|
3755 * coordinates.
|
|
|
3756 */
|
|
|
3757 void
|
|
|
3758 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y)
|
|
|
3759 {
|
|
|
3760 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3761 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
3762 #else
|
|
|
3763 gdk_window_move(gui.mainwin->window, x, y);
|
|
|
3764 #endif
|
|
|
3765 }
|
|
|
3766
|
|
|
3767 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3768 #if 0
|
|
|
3769 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE;
|
|
|
3770 /*
|
|
|
3771 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure
|
|
|
3772 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager
|
|
|
3773 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized.
|
|
|
3774 *
|
|
|
3775 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution.
|
|
|
3776 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize().
|
|
|
3777 *
|
|
|
3778 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke
|
|
|
3779 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would
|
|
|
3780 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window
|
|
|
3781 * layout to be messed up.
|
|
|
3782 */
|
|
|
3783 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
3784 static gboolean
|
|
|
3785 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data)
|
|
|
3786 {
|
|
|
3787 if (gui.mainwin != NULL
|
|
|
3788 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3789 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
3790 {
|
|
|
3791 int width;
|
|
|
3792 int height;
|
|
|
3793
|
|
|
3794 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height);
|
|
|
3795
|
|
|
3796 width -= get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
3797 height -= get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
3798
|
|
|
3799 gui_resize_shell(width, height);
|
|
|
3800 }
|
|
|
3801
|
|
|
3802 resize_idle_installed = FALSE;
|
|
|
3803 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */
|
|
|
3804 }
|
|
|
3805 #endif
|
|
|
3806 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
3807
|
|
|
3808 /*
|
|
|
3809 * Set the windows size.
|
|
|
3810 */
|
|
|
3811 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
3812 void
|
|
|
3813 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height,
|
|
|
3814 int min_width, int min_height,
|
|
|
3815 int base_width, int base_height)
|
|
|
3816 {
|
|
|
3817 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3818 /* Hack: When the form already is at the desired size, the window might
|
|
|
3819 * have been resized with the mouse. Force a resize by setting a
|
|
|
3820 * different size first. */
|
|
|
3821 if (GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->width == width
|
|
|
3822 && GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->height == height)
|
|
|
3823 {
|
|
|
3824 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width + 1, height + 1);
|
|
|
3825 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
3826 }
|
|
|
3827 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width, height);
|
|
|
3828 #endif
|
|
|
3829
|
|
|
3830 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */
|
|
|
3831 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
3832
|
|
|
3833 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */
|
|
|
3834 update_window_manager_hints();
|
|
|
3835
|
|
|
3836 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3837 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize
|
|
|
3838 * the window. So lets do it the other way around and resize the
|
|
|
3839 * main window instead. */
|
|
|
3840 width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
3841 height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
3842
|
|
|
3843 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height);
|
|
|
3844
|
|
|
3845 #if 0
|
|
|
3846 if (!resize_idle_installed)
|
|
|
3847 {
|
|
|
3848 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10,
|
|
|
3849 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
3850 resize_idle_installed = TRUE;
|
|
|
3851 }
|
|
|
3852 #endif
|
|
|
3853 /*
|
|
|
3854 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the
|
|
|
3855 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas.
|
|
|
3856 *
|
|
|
3857 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI
|
|
|
3858 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss.
|
|
|
3859 */
|
|
|
3860 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
3861 #endif
|
|
|
3862 }
|
|
|
3863
|
|
|
3864
|
|
|
3865 /*
|
|
|
3866 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger
|
|
|
3867 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window
|
|
|
3868 * decorations.
|
|
|
3869 */
|
|
|
3870 void
|
|
|
3871 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h)
|
|
|
3872 {
|
|
|
3873 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
3874 GdkScreen* screen;
|
|
|
3875
|
|
|
3876 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
3877 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
3878 else
|
|
|
3879 screen = gdk_screen_get_default();
|
|
|
3880
|
|
|
3881 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen);
|
|
|
3882 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr;
|
|
|
3883 #else
|
|
|
3884 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width();
|
|
|
3885 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the
|
|
|
3886 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */
|
|
|
3887 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr;
|
|
|
3888 #endif
|
|
|
3889
|
|
|
3890 /*
|
|
|
3891 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include
|
|
|
3892 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen
|
|
|
3893 * hight, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen.
|
|
|
3894 * This should be completely changed later.
|
|
|
3895 */
|
|
|
3896 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
3897 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
3898 }
|
|
|
3899
|
|
|
3900 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3901 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3902 void
|
|
|
3903 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon)
|
|
|
3904 {
|
|
|
3905 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3906 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
3907 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL);
|
|
|
3908 # endif
|
|
|
3909
|
|
|
3910 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title);
|
|
|
3911
|
|
|
3912 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3913 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
3914 vim_free(title);
|
|
|
3915 # endif
|
|
|
3916 }
|
|
|
3917 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */
|
|
|
3918
|
|
|
3919 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3920 void
|
|
|
3921 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit)
|
|
|
3922 {
|
|
|
3923 GtkWidget *widget;
|
|
|
3924
|
|
|
3925 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3926 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3927 widget = gui.menubar_h;
|
|
|
3928 else
|
|
|
3929 # endif
|
|
|
3930 widget = gui.menubar;
|
|
|
3931
|
|
|
3932 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
3933 {
|
|
|
3934 if (showit)
|
|
|
3935 gtk_widget_show(widget);
|
|
|
3936 else
|
|
|
3937 gtk_widget_hide(widget);
|
|
|
3938
|
|
|
3939 update_window_manager_hints();
|
|
|
3940 }
|
|
|
3941 }
|
|
|
3942 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
3943
|
|
|
3944 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3945 void
|
|
|
3946 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit)
|
|
|
3947 {
|
|
|
3948 GtkWidget *widget;
|
|
|
3949
|
|
|
3950 if (gui.toolbar == NULL)
|
|
|
3951 return;
|
|
|
3952
|
|
|
3953 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3954 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3955 widget = gui.toolbar_h;
|
|
|
3956 else
|
|
|
3957 # endif
|
|
|
3958 widget = gui.toolbar;
|
|
|
3959
|
|
|
3960 if (showit)
|
|
|
3961 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3962
|
|
|
3963 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
3964 {
|
|
|
3965 if (showit)
|
|
|
3966 gtk_widget_show(widget);
|
|
|
3967 else
|
|
|
3968 gtk_widget_hide(widget);
|
|
|
3969
|
|
|
3970 update_window_manager_hints();
|
|
|
3971 }
|
|
|
3972 }
|
|
|
3973 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
3974
|
|
|
3975 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3976 /*
|
|
|
3977 * Get a font structure for highlighting.
|
|
|
3978 * "cbdata" is a pointer to the global gui structure.
|
|
|
3979 */
|
|
|
3980 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3981 static void
|
|
|
3982 font_sel_ok(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
3983 {
|
|
|
3984 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
3985 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fs = (GtkFontSelectionDialog *)vw->fontdlg;
|
|
|
3986
|
|
|
3987 if (vw->fontname)
|
|
|
3988 g_free(vw->fontname);
|
|
|
3989
|
|
|
3990 vw->fontname = (char_u *)gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(fs);
|
|
|
3991 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg);
|
|
|
3992 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
3993 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3994 }
|
|
|
3995
|
|
|
3996 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3997 static void
|
|
|
3998 font_sel_cancel(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
3999 {
|
|
|
4000 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4001
|
|
|
4002 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg);
|
|
|
4003 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4004 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4005 }
|
|
|
4006
|
|
|
4007 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
4008 static void
|
|
|
4009 font_sel_destroy(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4010 {
|
|
|
4011 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4012
|
|
|
4013 vw->fontdlg = NULL;
|
|
|
4014 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4015 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4016 }
|
|
|
4017 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4018
|
|
|
4019 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4020 /*
|
|
|
4021 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It
|
|
|
4022 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given
|
|
|
4023 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check
|
|
|
4024 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by
|
|
|
4025 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'.
|
|
|
4026 */
|
|
|
4027 static int
|
|
|
4028 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc)
|
|
|
4029 {
|
|
|
4030 static const char * const cjk_langs[] =
|
|
|
4031 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"};
|
|
|
4032
|
|
|
4033 PangoFont *font;
|
|
|
4034 unsigned i;
|
|
|
4035 int is_cjk = FALSE;
|
|
|
4036
|
|
|
4037 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc);
|
|
|
4038
|
|
|
4039 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4040 return FALSE;
|
|
|
4041
|
|
|
4042 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i)
|
|
|
4043 {
|
|
|
4044 PangoCoverage *coverage;
|
|
|
4045 gunichar uc;
|
|
|
4046
|
|
|
4047 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage(
|
|
|
4048 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i]));
|
|
|
4049
|
|
|
4050 if (coverage != NULL)
|
|
|
4051 {
|
|
|
4052 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00;
|
|
|
4053 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT);
|
|
|
4054 pango_coverage_unref(coverage);
|
|
|
4055 }
|
|
|
4056 }
|
|
|
4057
|
|
|
4058 g_object_unref(font);
|
|
|
4059
|
|
|
4060 return is_cjk;
|
|
|
4061 }
|
|
|
4062 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4063
|
|
|
4064 int
|
|
|
4065 gui_mch_adjust_charsize(void)
|
|
|
4066 {
|
|
|
4067 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4068 PangoFontMetrics *metrics;
|
|
|
4069 int ascent;
|
|
|
4070 int descent;
|
|
|
4071
|
|
|
4072 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font,
|
|
|
4073 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context));
|
|
|
4074 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics);
|
|
|
4075 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics);
|
|
|
4076
|
|
|
4077 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics);
|
|
|
4078
|
|
|
4079 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE
|
|
|
4080 + p_linespace;
|
|
|
4081 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2);
|
|
|
4082
|
|
|
4083 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4084
|
|
|
4085 gui.char_height = gui.current_font->ascent + gui.current_font->descent
|
|
|
4086 + p_linespace;
|
|
|
4087 gui.char_ascent = gui.current_font->ascent + p_linespace / 2;
|
|
|
4088
|
|
|
4089 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4090
|
|
|
4091 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens
|
|
|
4092 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */
|
|
|
4093 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0);
|
|
|
4094 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1);
|
|
|
4095
|
|
|
4096 return OK;
|
|
|
4097 }
|
|
|
4098
|
|
|
4099 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4100 /*
|
|
|
4101 * Try to load the requested fontset.
|
|
|
4102 */
|
|
|
4103 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
4104 GuiFontset
|
|
|
4105 gui_mch_get_fontset(char_u *name, int report_error, int fixed_width)
|
|
|
4106 {
|
|
|
4107 GdkFont *font;
|
|
|
4108
|
|
|
4109 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL)
|
|
|
4110 return NOFONT;
|
|
|
4111
|
|
|
4112 font = gdk_fontset_load((gchar *)name);
|
|
|
4113
|
|
|
4114 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4115 {
|
|
|
4116 if (report_error)
|
|
|
4117 EMSG2(_(e_fontset), name);
|
|
|
4118 return NOFONT;
|
|
|
4119 }
|
|
|
4120 /* TODO: check if the font is fixed width. */
|
|
|
4121
|
|
|
4122 /* reference this font as being in use */
|
|
|
4123 gdk_font_ref(font);
|
|
|
4124
|
|
|
4125 return (GuiFontset)font;
|
|
|
4126 }
|
|
|
4127 #endif /* FEAT_XFONTSET */
|
|
|
4128
|
|
|
4129 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4130 /*
|
|
|
4131 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4132 * "oldval" is the previous value.
|
|
|
4133 * Return NULL when cancelled.
|
|
|
4134 */
|
|
|
4135 char_u *
|
|
|
4136 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval)
|
|
|
4137 {
|
|
|
4138 char_u *fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4139
|
|
|
4140 if (!gui.fontdlg)
|
|
|
4141 {
|
|
|
4142 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd = NULL;
|
|
|
4143
|
|
|
4144 gui.fontdlg = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(_("Font Selection"));
|
|
|
4145 fsd = GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg);
|
|
|
4146 gtk_window_set_modal(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), TRUE);
|
|
|
4147 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg),
|
|
|
4148 GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
4149 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.fontdlg), "destroy",
|
|
|
4150 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_destroy), &gui);
|
|
|
4151 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->ok_button), "clicked",
|
|
|
4152 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_ok), &gui);
|
|
|
4153 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->cancel_button), "clicked",
|
|
|
4154 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_cancel), &gui);
|
|
|
4155 }
|
|
|
4156
|
|
|
4157 if (oldval != NULL && *oldval != NUL)
|
|
|
4158 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(
|
|
|
4159 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), (char *)oldval);
|
|
|
4160
|
|
|
4161 if (gui.fontname)
|
|
|
4162 {
|
|
|
4163 g_free(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4164 gui.fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4165 }
|
|
|
4166 gtk_window_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE);
|
|
|
4167 gtk_widget_show(gui.fontdlg);
|
|
|
4168 {
|
|
|
4169 static gchar *spacings[] = {"c", "m", NULL};
|
|
|
4170
|
|
|
4171 /* In GTK 1.2.3 this must be after the gtk_widget_show() call,
|
|
|
4172 * otherwise everything is blocked for ten seconds. */
|
|
|
4173 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_filter(
|
|
|
4174 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg),
|
|
|
4175 GTK_FONT_FILTER_BASE,
|
|
|
4176 GTK_FONT_ALL, NULL, NULL,
|
|
|
4177 NULL, NULL, spacings, NULL);
|
|
|
4178 }
|
|
|
4179
|
|
|
4180 /* Wait for the font dialog to be closed. */
|
|
|
4181 while (gui.fontdlg && GTK_WIDGET_DRAWABLE(gui.fontdlg))
|
|
|
4182 gtk_main_iteration_do(TRUE);
|
|
|
4183
|
|
|
4184 if (gui.fontname != NULL)
|
|
|
4185 {
|
|
|
4186 fontname = vim_strsave(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4187 g_free(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4188 gui.fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4189 }
|
|
|
4190 return fontname;
|
|
|
4191 }
|
|
|
4192 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4193
|
|
|
4194 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4195 /*
|
|
|
4196 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4197 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled.
|
|
|
4198 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm.
|
|
|
4199 * FIXME:
|
|
|
4200 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either
|
|
|
4201 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or
|
|
|
4202 * b) just live with it.
|
|
|
4203 */
|
|
|
4204 char_u *
|
|
|
4205 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval)
|
|
|
4206 {
|
|
|
4207 GtkWidget *dialog;
|
|
|
4208 int response;
|
|
|
4209 char_u *fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4210 char_u *oldname;
|
|
|
4211
|
|
|
4212 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL);
|
|
|
4213
|
|
|
4214 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
4215 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE);
|
|
|
4216
|
|
|
4217 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL)
|
|
|
4218 {
|
|
|
4219 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4220 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL);
|
|
|
4221 else
|
|
|
4222 oldname = oldval;
|
|
|
4223
|
|
|
4224 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a
|
|
|
4225 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */
|
|
|
4226 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1]))
|
|
|
4227 {
|
|
|
4228 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3);
|
|
|
4229
|
|
|
4230 if (p != NULL)
|
|
|
4231 {
|
|
|
4232 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10");
|
|
|
4233 if (oldname != oldval)
|
|
|
4234 vim_free(oldname);
|
|
|
4235 oldname = p;
|
|
|
4236 }
|
|
|
4237 }
|
|
|
4238
|
|
|
4239 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(
|
|
|
4240 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname);
|
|
|
4241
|
|
|
4242 if (oldname != oldval)
|
|
|
4243 vim_free(oldval);
|
|
|
4244 }
|
|
|
4245
|
|
|
4246 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog));
|
|
|
4247
|
|
|
4248 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK)
|
|
|
4249 {
|
|
|
4250 char *name;
|
|
|
4251
|
|
|
4252 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(
|
|
|
4253 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog));
|
|
|
4254 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
4255 {
|
|
|
4256 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4257 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, (char_u *)name, NULL);
|
|
|
4258 else
|
|
|
4259 fontname = vim_strsave((char_u *)name);
|
|
|
4260 g_free(name);
|
|
|
4261 }
|
|
|
4262 }
|
|
|
4263
|
|
|
4264 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE)
|
|
|
4265 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog);
|
|
|
4266
|
|
|
4267 return fontname;
|
|
|
4268 }
|
|
|
4269
|
|
|
4270 /*
|
|
|
4271 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back
|
|
|
4272 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text
|
|
|
4273 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try
|
|
|
4274 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it
|
|
|
4275 * otherwise.
|
|
|
4276 *
|
|
|
4277 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can
|
|
|
4278 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig
|
|
|
4279 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway.
|
|
|
4280 */
|
|
|
4281 static void
|
|
|
4282 get_styled_font_variants(void)
|
|
|
4283 {
|
|
|
4284 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc;
|
|
|
4285 PangoFont *plain_font;
|
|
|
4286 PangoFont *bold_font;
|
|
|
4287
|
|
|
4288 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE;
|
|
|
4289
|
|
|
4290 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4291
|
|
|
4292 if (plain_font == NULL)
|
|
|
4293 return;
|
|
|
4294
|
|
|
4295 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4296 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD);
|
|
|
4297
|
|
|
4298 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc);
|
|
|
4299 /*
|
|
|
4300 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*,
|
|
|
4301 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the
|
|
|
4302 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway.
|
|
|
4303 */
|
|
|
4304 if (bold_font != NULL)
|
|
|
4305 {
|
|
|
4306 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font);
|
|
|
4307 g_object_unref(bold_font);
|
|
|
4308 }
|
|
|
4309
|
|
|
4310 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc);
|
|
|
4311 g_object_unref(plain_font);
|
|
|
4312 }
|
|
|
4313
|
|
|
4314 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4315
|
|
|
4316 /*
|
|
|
4317 * There is only one excuse I can give for the following attempt to manage font
|
|
|
4318 * styles:
|
|
|
4319 *
|
|
|
4320 * I HATE THE BRAIN DEAD WAY X11 IS HANDLING FONTS (--mdcki)
|
|
|
4321 * (Me too. --danielk)
|
|
|
4322 */
|
|
|
4323 static void
|
|
|
4324 get_styled_font_variants(char_u * font_name)
|
|
|
4325 {
|
|
|
4326 char *chunk[32];
|
|
|
4327 char *sdup;
|
|
|
4328 char *tmp;
|
|
|
4329 int len, i;
|
|
|
4330 GuiFont *styled_font[3];
|
|
|
4331
|
|
|
4332 styled_font[0] = &gui.bold_font;
|
|
|
4333 styled_font[1] = &gui.ital_font;
|
|
|
4334 styled_font[2] = &gui.boldital_font;
|
|
|
4335
|
|
|
4336 /* First free whatever was freviously there. */
|
|
|
4337 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
|
|
|
4338 if (*styled_font[i])
|
|
|
4339 {
|
|
|
4340 gdk_font_unref(*styled_font[i]);
|
|
|
4341 *styled_font[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
4342 }
|
|
|
4343
|
|
|
4344 if ((sdup = g_strdup((const char *)font_name)) == NULL)
|
|
|
4345 return;
|
|
|
4346
|
|
|
4347 /* split up the whole */
|
|
|
4348 i = 0;
|
|
|
4349 for (tmp = sdup; *tmp != '\0'; ++tmp)
|
|
|
4350 {
|
|
|
4351 if (*tmp == '-')
|
|
|
4352 {
|
|
|
4353 *tmp = '\0';
|
|
|
4354
|
|
|
4355 if (i == 32)
|
|
|
4356 break;
|
|
|
4357
|
|
|
4358 chunk[i] = tmp + 1;
|
|
|
4359 ++i;
|
|
|
4360 }
|
|
|
4361 }
|
|
|
4362
|
|
|
4363 if (i == 14)
|
|
|
4364 {
|
|
|
4365 GdkFont *font = NULL;
|
|
|
4366 const char *bold_chunk[3] = { "bold", NULL, "bold" };
|
|
|
4367 const char *italic_chunk[3] = { NULL, "o", "o" };
|
|
|
4368
|
|
|
4369 /* font name was complete */
|
|
|
4370 len = strlen((const char *)font_name) + 32;
|
|
|
4371
|
|
|
4372 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
|
|
|
4373 {
|
|
|
4374 char *styled_name;
|
|
|
4375 int j;
|
|
|
4376
|
|
|
4377 styled_name = (char *)alloc(len);
|
|
|
4378 if (styled_name == NULL)
|
|
|
4379 {
|
|
|
4380 g_free(sdup);
|
|
|
4381 return;
|
|
|
4382 }
|
|
|
4383
|
|
|
4384 *styled_name = '\0';
|
|
|
4385
|
|
|
4386 for (j = 0; j < 14; ++j)
|
|
|
4387 {
|
|
|
4388 strcat(styled_name, "-");
|
|
|
4389 if (j == 2 && bold_chunk[i] != NULL)
|
|
|
4390 strcat(styled_name, bold_chunk[i]);
|
|
|
4391 else if (j == 3 && italic_chunk[i] != NULL)
|
|
|
4392 strcat(styled_name, italic_chunk[i]);
|
|
|
4393 else
|
|
|
4394 strcat(styled_name, chunk[j]);
|
|
|
4395 }
|
|
|
4396
|
|
|
4397 font = gui_mch_get_font((char_u *)styled_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
4398 if (font != NULL)
|
|
|
4399 *styled_font[i] = font;
|
|
|
4400
|
|
|
4401 vim_free(styled_name);
|
|
|
4402 }
|
|
|
4403 }
|
|
|
4404
|
|
|
4405 g_free(sdup);
|
|
|
4406 }
|
|
|
4407 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4408
|
|
|
4409 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4410 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL;
|
|
|
4411
|
|
|
4412 /*
|
|
|
4413 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs
|
|
|
4414 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip
|
|
|
4415 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case.
|
|
|
4416 */
|
|
|
4417 static void
|
|
|
4418 ascii_glyph_table_init(void)
|
|
|
4419 {
|
|
|
4420 char_u ascii_chars[128];
|
|
|
4421 PangoAttrList *attr_list;
|
|
|
4422 GList *item_list;
|
|
|
4423 int i;
|
|
|
4424
|
|
|
4425 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
4426 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
4427 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL)
|
|
|
4428 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
4429
|
|
|
4430 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL;
|
|
|
4431 gui.ascii_font = NULL;
|
|
|
4432
|
|
|
4433 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */
|
|
|
4434 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i)
|
|
|
4435 ascii_chars[i] = '?';
|
|
|
4436 for (; i < 127; ++i)
|
|
|
4437 ascii_chars[i] = i;
|
|
|
4438 ascii_chars[i] = '?';
|
|
|
4439
|
|
|
4440 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new();
|
|
|
4441 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars,
|
|
|
4442 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL);
|
|
|
4443
|
|
|
4444 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */
|
|
|
4445 {
|
|
|
4446 PangoItem *item;
|
|
|
4447 int width;
|
|
|
4448
|
|
|
4449 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data;
|
|
|
4450 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
4451
|
|
|
4452 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */
|
|
|
4453 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine;
|
|
|
4454
|
|
|
4455 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font;
|
|
|
4456 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
4457
|
|
|
4458 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new();
|
|
|
4459
|
|
|
4460 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars),
|
|
|
4461 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
4462
|
|
|
4463 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars));
|
|
|
4464
|
|
|
4465 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i)
|
|
|
4466 {
|
|
|
4467 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom;
|
|
|
4468
|
|
|
4469 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry;
|
|
|
4470 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2;
|
|
|
4471 geom->width = width;
|
|
|
4472 }
|
|
|
4473 }
|
|
|
4474
|
|
|
4475 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL);
|
|
|
4476 g_list_free(item_list);
|
|
|
4477 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list);
|
|
|
4478 }
|
|
|
4479 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4480
|
|
|
4481 /*
|
|
|
4482 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name.
|
|
|
4483 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise.
|
|
|
4484 */
|
|
|
4485 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
4486 int
|
|
|
4487 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset)
|
|
|
4488 {
|
|
|
4489 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4490 PangoFontDescription *font_desc;
|
|
|
4491 PangoLayout *layout;
|
|
|
4492 int width;
|
|
|
4493
|
|
|
4494 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should
|
|
|
4495 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */
|
|
|
4496 if (font_name == NULL)
|
|
|
4497 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT;
|
|
|
4498
|
|
|
4499 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
4500
|
|
|
4501 if (font_desc == NULL)
|
|
|
4502 return FAIL;
|
|
|
4503
|
|
|
4504 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4505 gui.norm_font = font_desc;
|
|
|
4506
|
|
|
4507 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc);
|
|
|
4508
|
|
|
4509 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
4510 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2);
|
|
|
4511 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL);
|
|
|
4512 /*
|
|
|
4513 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size()
|
|
|
4514 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads
|
|
|
4515 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin
|
|
|
4516 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d
|
|
|
4517 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around
|
|
|
4518 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to
|
|
|
4519 * width for CJK fonts.
|
|
|
4520 *
|
|
|
4521 * For related bugs, see:
|
|
|
4522 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618
|
|
|
4523 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624
|
|
|
4524 *
|
|
|
4525 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine:
|
|
|
4526 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font
|
|
|
4527 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font
|
|
|
4528 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font
|
|
|
4529 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font
|
|
|
4530 */
|
|
|
4531 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font))
|
|
|
4532 {
|
|
|
4533 int cjk_width;
|
|
|
4534
|
|
|
4535 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */
|
|
|
4536 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1);
|
|
|
4537 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL);
|
|
|
4538
|
|
|
4539 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */
|
|
|
4540 width /= 2;
|
|
|
4541 }
|
|
|
4542 g_object_unref(layout);
|
|
|
4543
|
|
|
4544 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
4545
|
|
|
4546 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */
|
|
|
4547 if (gui.char_width <= 0)
|
|
|
4548 gui.char_width = 8;
|
|
|
4549
|
|
|
4550 gui_mch_adjust_charsize();
|
|
|
4551
|
|
|
4552 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */
|
|
|
4553 hl_set_font_name(font_name);
|
|
|
4554
|
|
|
4555 get_styled_font_variants();
|
|
|
4556 ascii_glyph_table_init();
|
|
|
4557
|
|
|
4558 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */
|
|
|
4559 if (gui.wide_font != NULL
|
|
|
4560 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font))
|
|
|
4561 {
|
|
|
4562 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font);
|
|
|
4563 gui.wide_font = NULL;
|
|
|
4564 }
|
|
|
4565
|
|
|
4566 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4567
|
|
|
4568 GdkFont *font = NULL;
|
|
|
4569
|
|
|
4570 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
4571 /* Try loading a fontset. If this fails we try loading a normal font. */
|
|
|
4572 if (fontset && font_name != NULL)
|
|
|
4573 font = gui_mch_get_fontset(font_name, TRUE, TRUE);
|
|
|
4574
|
|
|
4575 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4576 # endif
|
|
|
4577 {
|
|
|
4578 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should
|
|
|
4579 * be present on all X11 servers. */
|
|
|
4580 if (font_name == NULL)
|
|
|
4581 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT;
|
|
|
4582 font = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
4583 }
|
|
|
4584
|
|
|
4585 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4586 return FAIL;
|
|
|
4587
|
|
|
4588 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4589 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
4590 gui_mch_free_fontset(gui.fontset);
|
|
|
4591 if (font->type == GDK_FONT_FONTSET)
|
|
|
4592 {
|
|
|
4593 gui.norm_font = NOFONT;
|
|
|
4594 gui.fontset = (GuiFontset)font;
|
|
|
4595 /* Use two bytes, this works around the problem that the result would
|
|
|
4596 * be zero if no 8-bit font was found. */
|
|
|
4597 gui.char_width = gdk_string_width(font, "xW") / 2;
|
|
|
4598 }
|
|
|
4599 else
|
|
|
4600 # endif
|
|
|
4601 {
|
|
|
4602 gui.norm_font = font;
|
|
|
4603 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
4604 gui.fontset = NOFONTSET;
|
|
|
4605 # endif
|
|
|
4606 gui.char_width = ((XFontStruct *)
|
|
|
4607 GDK_FONT_XFONT(font))->max_bounds.width;
|
|
|
4608 }
|
|
|
4609
|
|
|
4610 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */
|
|
|
4611 if (gui.char_width <= 0)
|
|
|
4612 gui.char_width = 8;
|
|
|
4613
|
|
|
4614 gui.char_height = font->ascent + font->descent + p_linespace;
|
|
|
4615 gui.char_ascent = font->ascent + p_linespace / 2;
|
|
|
4616
|
|
|
4617 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens
|
|
|
4618 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */
|
|
|
4619 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0);
|
|
|
4620 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1);
|
|
|
4621
|
|
|
4622 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */
|
|
|
4623 hl_set_font_name(font_name);
|
|
|
4624
|
|
|
4625 if (font->type != GDK_FONT_FONTSET)
|
|
|
4626 get_styled_font_variants(font_name);
|
|
|
4627
|
|
|
4628 /* Synchronize the fonts used in user input dialogs, since otherwise
|
|
|
4629 * search/replace will be esp. annoying in case of international font
|
|
|
4630 * usage.
|
|
|
4631 */
|
|
|
4632 gui_gtk_synch_fonts();
|
|
|
4633
|
|
|
4634 # ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
4635 /* Adjust input management behaviour to the capabilities of the new
|
|
|
4636 * fontset */
|
|
|
4637 xim_decide_input_style();
|
|
|
4638 if (xim_get_status_area_height())
|
|
|
4639 {
|
|
|
4640 /* Status area is required. Just create the empty container so that
|
|
|
4641 * mainwin will allocate the extra space for status area. */
|
|
|
4642 GtkWidget *alignment = gtk_alignment_new((gfloat)0.5, (gfloat)0.5,
|
|
|
4643 (gfloat)1.0, (gfloat)1.0);
|
|
|
4644
|
|
|
4645 gtk_widget_set_usize(alignment, 20, gui.char_height + 2);
|
|
|
4646 gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(GTK_BIN(gui.mainwin)->child),
|
|
|
4647 alignment, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
4648 gtk_widget_show(alignment);
|
|
|
4649 }
|
|
|
4650 # endif
|
|
|
4651 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4652
|
|
|
4653 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */
|
|
|
4654 update_window_manager_hints();
|
|
|
4655
|
|
|
4656 return OK;
|
|
|
4657 }
|
|
|
4658
|
|
|
4659 /*
|
|
|
4660 * Get a reference to the font "name".
|
|
|
4661 * Return zero for failure.
|
|
|
4662 */
|
|
|
4663 GuiFont
|
|
|
4664 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error)
|
|
|
4665 {
|
|
|
4666 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4667 PangoFontDescription *font;
|
|
|
4668 #else
|
|
|
4669 GdkFont *font;
|
|
|
4670 #endif
|
|
|
4671
|
|
|
4672 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */
|
|
|
4673 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL)
|
|
|
4674 return NULL;
|
|
|
4675
|
|
|
4676 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4677 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4678 {
|
|
|
4679 char_u *buf;
|
|
|
4680
|
|
|
4681 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL);
|
|
|
4682 if (buf != NULL)
|
|
|
4683 {
|
|
|
4684 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf);
|
|
|
4685 vim_free(buf);
|
|
|
4686 }
|
|
|
4687 else
|
|
|
4688 font = NULL;
|
|
|
4689 }
|
|
|
4690 else
|
|
|
4691 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name);
|
|
|
4692
|
|
|
4693 if (font != NULL)
|
|
|
4694 {
|
|
|
4695 PangoFont *real_font;
|
|
|
4696
|
|
|
4697 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */
|
|
|
4698 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0)
|
|
|
4699 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE);
|
|
|
4700
|
|
|
4701 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font);
|
|
|
4702
|
|
|
4703 if (real_font == NULL)
|
|
|
4704 {
|
|
|
4705 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
4706 font = NULL;
|
|
|
4707 }
|
|
|
4708 else
|
|
|
4709 g_object_unref(real_font);
|
|
|
4710 }
|
|
|
4711 #else
|
|
|
4712 font = gdk_font_load((const gchar *)name);
|
|
|
4713 #endif
|
|
|
4714
|
|
|
4715 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4716 {
|
|
|
4717 if (report_error)
|
|
|
4718 EMSG2(_(e_font), name);
|
|
|
4719 return NULL;
|
|
|
4720 }
|
|
|
4721
|
|
|
4722 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4723 /*
|
|
|
4724 * The fixed-width check has been disabled for GTK+ 2. Rationale:
|
|
|
4725 *
|
|
|
4726 * - The check tends to report false positives, particularly
|
|
|
4727 * in non-Latin locales or with old X fonts.
|
|
|
4728 * - Thanks to our fixed-width hack in gui_gtk2_draw_string(),
|
|
|
4729 * GTK+ 2 Vim is actually capable of displaying variable width
|
|
|
4730 * fonts. Those will just be spaced out like in AA xterm.
|
|
|
4731 * - Failing here for the default font causes GUI startup to fail
|
|
|
4732 * even with wiped out configuration files.
|
|
|
4733 * - The font dialog displays all fonts unfiltered, and it's rather
|
|
|
4734 * annoying if 95% of the listed fonts produce an error message.
|
|
|
4735 */
|
|
|
4736 # if 0
|
|
|
4737 {
|
|
|
4738 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. Naturally, this is a bit
|
|
|
4739 * hackish -- fixed-width isn't really suitable for i18n text :/ */
|
|
|
4740 PangoLayout *layout;
|
|
|
4741 unsigned int i;
|
|
|
4742 int last_width = -1;
|
|
|
4743 const char test_chars[] = { 'W', 'i', ',', 'x' }; /* arbitrary */
|
|
|
4744
|
|
|
4745 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
4746 pango_layout_set_font_description(layout, font);
|
|
|
4747
|
|
|
4748 for (i = 0; i < G_N_ELEMENTS(test_chars); ++i)
|
|
|
4749 {
|
|
|
4750 int width;
|
|
|
4751
|
|
|
4752 pango_layout_set_text(layout, &test_chars[i], 1);
|
|
|
4753 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL);
|
|
|
4754
|
|
|
4755 if (last_width >= 0 && width != last_width)
|
|
|
4756 {
|
|
|
4757 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
4758 font = NULL;
|
|
|
4759 break;
|
|
|
4760 }
|
|
|
4761
|
|
|
4762 last_width = width;
|
|
|
4763 }
|
|
|
4764
|
|
|
4765 g_object_unref(layout);
|
|
|
4766 }
|
|
|
4767 # endif
|
|
|
4768 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4769 {
|
|
|
4770 XFontStruct *xfont;
|
|
|
4771
|
|
|
4772 /* reference this font as being in use */
|
|
|
4773 gdk_font_ref(font);
|
|
|
4774
|
|
|
4775 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font.
|
|
|
4776 */
|
|
|
4777 xfont = (XFontStruct *) GDK_FONT_XFONT(font);
|
|
|
4778
|
|
|
4779 if (xfont->max_bounds.width != xfont->min_bounds.width)
|
|
|
4780 {
|
|
|
4781 gdk_font_unref(font);
|
|
|
4782 font = NULL;
|
|
|
4783 }
|
|
|
4784 }
|
|
|
4785 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4786
|
|
|
4787 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || 0 /* disabled for GTK+ 2, see above */
|
|
|
4788 if (font == NULL && report_error)
|
|
|
4789 EMSG2(_(e_fontwidth), name);
|
|
|
4790 #endif
|
|
|
4791
|
|
|
4792 return font;
|
|
|
4793 }
|
|
|
4794
|
|
39
|
4795 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
38
|
4796 /*
|
|
|
4797 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4798 */
|
|
|
4799 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
4800 char_u *
|
|
|
4801 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name)
|
|
|
4802 {
|
|
39
|
4803 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
38
|
4804 if (font != NOFONT)
|
|
|
4805 {
|
|
|
4806 char *name = pango_font_description_to_string(font);
|
|
|
4807
|
|
|
4808 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
4809 {
|
|
|
4810 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)name);
|
|
|
4811
|
|
|
4812 g_free(name);
|
|
|
4813 return s;
|
|
|
4814 }
|
|
|
4815 }
|
|
39
|
4816 # else
|
|
38
|
4817 /* Don't know how to get the name, return what we got. */
|
|
|
4818 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
4819 return vim_strsave(name);
|
|
39
|
4820 # endif
|
|
38
|
4821 return NULL;
|
|
|
4822 }
|
|
39
|
4823 #endif
|
|
38
|
4824
|
|
7
|
4825 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4826 /*
|
|
|
4827 * Set the current text font.
|
|
|
4828 * Since we create all GC on demand, we use just gui.current_font to
|
|
|
4829 * indicate the desired current font.
|
|
|
4830 */
|
|
|
4831 void
|
|
|
4832 gui_mch_set_font(GuiFont font)
|
|
|
4833 {
|
|
|
4834 gui.current_font = font;
|
|
|
4835 }
|
|
|
4836 #endif
|
|
|
4837
|
|
|
4838 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4839 /*
|
|
|
4840 * Set the current text fontset.
|
|
|
4841 */
|
|
|
4842 void
|
|
|
4843 gui_mch_set_fontset(GuiFontset fontset)
|
|
|
4844 {
|
|
|
4845 gui.current_font = fontset;
|
|
|
4846 }
|
|
|
4847 #endif
|
|
|
4848
|
|
|
4849 /*
|
|
|
4850 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure.
|
|
|
4851 */
|
|
|
4852 void
|
|
|
4853 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font)
|
|
|
4854 {
|
|
|
4855 if (font != NOFONT)
|
|
|
4856 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4857 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
4858 #else
|
|
|
4859 gdk_font_unref(font);
|
|
|
4860 #endif
|
|
|
4861 }
|
|
|
4862
|
|
|
4863 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4864 /*
|
|
|
4865 * If a fontset is not going to be used, free its structure.
|
|
|
4866 */
|
|
|
4867 void
|
|
|
4868 gui_mch_free_fontset(GuiFontset fontset)
|
|
|
4869 {
|
|
|
4870 if (fontset != NOFONTSET)
|
|
|
4871 gdk_font_unref(fontset);
|
|
|
4872 }
|
|
|
4873 #endif
|
|
|
4874
|
|
|
4875
|
|
|
4876 /*
|
|
|
4877 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was
|
|
|
4878 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif
|
|
|
4879 * Programmer's Guide.
|
|
|
4880 * Return INVALCOLOR for error.
|
|
|
4881 */
|
|
|
4882 guicolor_T
|
|
|
4883 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name)
|
|
|
4884 {
|
|
|
4885 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */
|
|
|
4886 static const char *const vimnames[][2] =
|
|
|
4887 {
|
|
|
4888 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"},
|
|
|
4889 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"},
|
|
|
4890 {"LightMagenta", "#FFBBFF"},
|
|
|
4891 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"},
|
|
|
4892 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"},
|
|
|
4893 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"},
|
|
|
4894 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"},
|
|
|
4895 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"},
|
|
|
4896 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"},
|
|
|
4897 {NULL, NULL}
|
|
|
4898 };
|
|
|
4899
|
|
|
4900 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */
|
|
|
4901 return INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
4902
|
|
|
4903 while (name != NULL)
|
|
|
4904 {
|
|
|
4905 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
4906 int parsed;
|
|
|
4907 int i;
|
|
|
4908
|
|
|
4909 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color);
|
|
|
4910
|
|
|
4911 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* ohh, lovely GTK+ 2, eases our pain :) */
|
|
|
4912 /*
|
|
|
4913 * Since we have already called gtk_set_locale here the bugger
|
|
|
4914 * XParseColor will accept only explicit color names in the language
|
|
|
4915 * of the current locale. However this will interferre with:
|
|
|
4916 * 1. Vim's global startup files
|
|
|
4917 * 2. Explicit color names in .vimrc
|
|
|
4918 *
|
|
|
4919 * Therefore we first try to parse the color in the current locale and
|
|
|
4920 * if it fails, we fall back to the portable "C" one.
|
|
|
4921 */
|
|
|
4922 if (!parsed)
|
|
|
4923 {
|
|
|
4924 char *current;
|
|
|
4925
|
|
|
4926 current = setlocale(LC_ALL, NULL);
|
|
|
4927 if (current != NULL)
|
|
|
4928 {
|
|
|
4929 char *saved;
|
|
|
4930
|
|
|
4931 saved = g_strdup(current);
|
|
|
4932 setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
|
|
|
4933
|
|
|
4934 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const gchar *)name, &color);
|
|
|
4935
|
|
|
4936 setlocale(LC_ALL, saved);
|
|
|
4937 gtk_set_locale();
|
|
|
4938
|
|
|
4939 g_free(saved);
|
|
|
4940 }
|
|
|
4941 }
|
|
|
4942 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4943
|
|
|
4944 if (parsed)
|
|
|
4945 {
|
|
|
4946 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4947 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
4948 &color, FALSE, TRUE);
|
|
|
4949 #else
|
|
|
4950 gdk_color_alloc(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), &color);
|
|
|
4951 #endif
|
|
|
4952 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel;
|
|
|
4953 }
|
|
|
4954 /* add a few builtin names and try again */
|
|
|
4955 for (i = 0; ; ++i)
|
|
|
4956 {
|
|
|
4957 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL)
|
|
|
4958 {
|
|
|
4959 name = NULL;
|
|
|
4960 break;
|
|
|
4961 }
|
|
|
4962 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0)
|
|
|
4963 {
|
|
|
4964 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1];
|
|
|
4965 break;
|
|
|
4966 }
|
|
|
4967 }
|
|
|
4968 }
|
|
|
4969
|
|
|
4970 return INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
4971 }
|
|
|
4972
|
|
|
4973 /*
|
|
|
4974 * Set the current text foreground color.
|
|
|
4975 */
|
|
|
4976 void
|
|
|
4977 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
4978 {
|
|
|
4979 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
4980 }
|
|
|
4981
|
|
|
4982 /*
|
|
|
4983 * Set the current text background color.
|
|
|
4984 */
|
|
|
4985 void
|
|
|
4986 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
4987 {
|
|
|
4988 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
4989 }
|
|
|
4990
|
|
|
4991 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4992 /*
|
|
|
4993 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency.
|
|
|
4994 */
|
|
|
4995 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \
|
|
|
4996 G_STMT_START{ \
|
|
|
4997 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \
|
|
|
4998 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \
|
|
|
4999 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \
|
|
|
5000 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \
|
|
|
5001 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \
|
|
|
5002 }G_STMT_END
|
|
|
5003
|
|
|
5004 static void
|
|
|
5005 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list)
|
|
|
5006 {
|
|
|
5007 char_u *start = NULL;
|
|
|
5008 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5009 int uc;
|
|
|
5010
|
|
|
5011 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p))
|
|
|
5012 {
|
|
|
5013 uc = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5014
|
|
|
5015 if (start == NULL)
|
|
|
5016 {
|
|
|
5017 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2)
|
|
|
5018 start = p;
|
|
|
5019 }
|
|
|
5020 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */
|
|
|
5021 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc)))
|
|
|
5022 {
|
|
|
5023 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font),
|
|
|
5024 attr_list, start - s, p - s);
|
|
|
5025 start = NULL;
|
|
|
5026 }
|
|
|
5027 }
|
|
|
5028
|
|
|
5029 if (start != NULL)
|
|
|
5030 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font),
|
|
|
5031 attr_list, start - s, len);
|
|
|
5032 }
|
|
|
5033
|
|
|
5034 static int
|
|
|
5035 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item,
|
|
|
5036 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i,
|
|
|
5037 int *cluster_width,
|
|
|
5038 int *last_glyph_rbearing)
|
|
|
5039 {
|
|
|
5040 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5041 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */
|
|
|
5042 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */
|
|
|
5043 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */
|
|
|
5044 int uc;
|
|
|
5045 int cellcount = 0;
|
|
|
5046
|
|
|
5047 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width;
|
|
|
5048
|
|
|
5049 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next)
|
|
|
5050 {
|
|
|
5051 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start)
|
|
|
5052 break;
|
|
|
5053 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width)
|
|
|
5054 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width;
|
|
|
5055 }
|
|
|
5056
|
|
|
5057 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i];
|
|
|
5058 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ?
|
|
|
5059 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length);
|
|
|
5060
|
|
|
5061 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p))
|
|
|
5062 {
|
|
|
5063 uc = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5064 if (uc < 0x80)
|
|
|
5065 ++cellcount;
|
|
|
5066 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc))
|
|
|
5067 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc);
|
|
|
5068 }
|
|
|
5069
|
|
|
5070 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL
|
|
|
5071 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs)
|
|
|
5072 {
|
|
|
5073 PangoRectangle ink_rect;
|
|
|
5074 /*
|
|
|
5075 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace
|
|
|
5076 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according
|
|
|
5077 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph.
|
|
|
5078 */
|
|
|
5079 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font,
|
|
|
5080 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph,
|
|
|
5081 &ink_rect, NULL);
|
|
|
5082
|
|
|
5083 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0)
|
|
|
5084 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect);
|
|
|
5085 }
|
|
|
5086
|
|
|
5087 if (cellcount > 0)
|
|
|
5088 *cluster_width = width;
|
|
|
5089
|
|
|
5090 return cellcount;
|
|
|
5091 }
|
|
|
5092
|
|
|
5093 /*
|
|
|
5094 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just
|
|
|
5095 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore
|
|
|
5096 * some guesswork is needed.
|
|
|
5097 *
|
|
|
5098 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing
|
|
|
5099 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due
|
|
|
5100 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune
|
|
|
5101 * x_offset to avoid uglyness.
|
|
|
5102 *
|
|
|
5103 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to
|
|
|
5104 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old
|
|
|
5105 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by
|
|
|
5106 * Pango.
|
|
|
5107 */
|
|
|
5108 static void
|
|
|
5109 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph,
|
|
|
5110 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width,
|
|
|
5111 int last_glyph_rbearing)
|
|
|
5112 {
|
|
|
5113 PangoRectangle ink_rect;
|
|
|
5114 PangoRectangle logical_rect;
|
|
|
5115 int width;
|
|
|
5116
|
|
|
5117 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5118 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5119 glyph->geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5120
|
|
|
5121 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font,
|
|
|
5122 glyph->glyph,
|
|
|
5123 &ink_rect, &logical_rect);
|
|
|
5124 if (ink_rect.x < 0)
|
|
|
5125 {
|
|
|
5126 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing;
|
|
|
5127 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height
|
|
|
5128 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5129 }
|
|
|
5130 }
|
|
|
5131
|
|
|
5132 static void
|
|
|
5133 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags,
|
|
|
5134 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs)
|
|
|
5135 {
|
|
|
5136 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP))
|
|
|
5137 {
|
|
|
5138 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
5139
|
|
|
5140 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5141 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5142 TRUE,
|
|
|
5143 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
5144 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
5145 num_cells * gui.char_width,
|
|
|
5146 gui.char_height);
|
|
|
5147 }
|
|
|
5148
|
|
|
5149 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5150
|
|
|
5151 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5152 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5153 font,
|
|
|
5154 TEXT_X(col),
|
|
|
5155 TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5156 glyphs);
|
|
|
5157
|
|
|
5158 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */
|
|
|
5159 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5160 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5161 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5162 font,
|
|
|
5163 TEXT_X(col) + 1,
|
|
|
5164 TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5165 glyphs);
|
|
|
5166 }
|
|
|
5167
|
|
|
5168 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5169
|
|
|
5170 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5171 int
|
|
|
5172 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags)
|
|
|
5173 {
|
|
|
5174 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */
|
|
|
5175 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */
|
|
|
5176 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */
|
|
|
5177 int i;
|
|
|
5178 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */
|
|
|
5179 char_u *new_conv_buf;
|
|
|
5180 int convlen;
|
|
|
5181 char_u *sp, *bp;
|
|
|
5182 int plen;
|
|
|
5183
|
|
|
5184 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5185 return len;
|
|
|
5186
|
|
|
5187 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
5188 {
|
|
|
5189 /*
|
|
|
5190 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set
|
|
|
5191 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c
|
|
|
5192 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is
|
|
|
5193 * in use.
|
|
|
5194 */
|
|
|
5195 convlen = len;
|
|
|
5196 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen);
|
|
|
5197 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len);
|
|
|
5198
|
|
|
5199 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are
|
|
|
5200 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to
|
|
|
5201 * compensate for that. */
|
|
|
5202 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; )
|
|
|
5203 {
|
|
|
5204 plen = utf_ptr2len_check(bp);
|
|
|
5205 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1)
|
|
|
5206 {
|
|
|
5207 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2);
|
|
|
5208 if (new_conv_buf == NULL)
|
|
|
5209 return len;
|
|
|
5210 plen += bp - conv_buf;
|
|
|
5211 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen);
|
|
|
5212 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' ';
|
|
|
5213 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen,
|
|
|
5214 convlen - plen + 1);
|
|
|
5215 vim_free(conv_buf);
|
|
|
5216 conv_buf = new_conv_buf;
|
|
|
5217 ++convlen;
|
|
|
5218 bp = conv_buf + plen;
|
|
|
5219 plen = 1;
|
|
|
5220 }
|
|
|
5221 sp += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(sp);
|
|
|
5222 bp += plen;
|
|
|
5223 }
|
|
|
5224 s = conv_buf;
|
|
|
5225 len = convlen;
|
|
|
5226 }
|
|
|
5227
|
|
|
5228 /*
|
|
|
5229 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent
|
|
|
5230 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen.
|
|
|
5231 */
|
|
|
5232 area.x = gui.border_offset;
|
|
|
5233 area.y = FILL_Y(row);
|
|
|
5234 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5235 area.height = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
5236
|
|
|
5237 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0);
|
|
|
5238 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area);
|
|
|
5239
|
|
|
5240 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new();
|
|
|
5241
|
|
|
5242 /*
|
|
|
5243 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process
|
|
|
5244 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective
|
|
|
5245 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen.
|
|
|
5246 */
|
|
|
5247 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC)
|
|
|
5248 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5249 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
5250 {
|
|
|
5251 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5252
|
|
|
5253 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p)
|
|
|
5254 if (*p & 0x80)
|
|
|
5255 goto not_ascii;
|
|
|
5256
|
|
|
5257 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len);
|
|
|
5258
|
|
|
5259 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
5260 {
|
|
|
5261 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]];
|
|
|
5262 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i;
|
|
|
5263 }
|
|
|
5264
|
|
|
5265 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs);
|
|
|
5266
|
|
|
5267 column_offset = len;
|
|
|
5268 }
|
|
|
5269 else
|
|
|
5270 not_ascii:
|
|
|
5271 {
|
|
|
5272 PangoAttrList *attr_list;
|
|
|
5273 GList *item_list;
|
|
|
5274 int cluster_width;
|
|
|
5275 int last_glyph_rbearing;
|
|
|
5276 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */
|
|
|
5277
|
|
26
|
5278 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8
|
|
|
5279 * characters. */
|
|
|
5280 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len))
|
|
|
5281 {
|
|
|
5282 column_offset = len;
|
|
|
5283 goto skipitall;
|
|
|
5284 }
|
|
|
5285
|
|
7
|
5286 /* original width of the current cluster */
|
|
|
5287 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5288
|
|
|
5289 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */
|
|
|
5290 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5291
|
|
|
5292 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new();
|
|
|
5293
|
|
|
5294 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters.
|
|
|
5295 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */
|
|
|
5296 if (gui.wide_font != NULL)
|
|
|
5297 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list);
|
|
|
5298
|
|
|
5299 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5300 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD),
|
|
|
5301 attr_list, 0, len);
|
|
|
5302 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC)
|
|
|
5303 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC),
|
|
|
5304 attr_list, 0, len);
|
|
|
5305 /*
|
|
|
5306 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level
|
|
|
5307 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment,
|
|
|
5308 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better
|
|
|
5309 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :)
|
|
|
5310 */
|
|
|
5311 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context,
|
|
|
5312 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL);
|
|
|
5313
|
|
|
5314 while (item_list != NULL)
|
|
|
5315 {
|
|
|
5316 PangoItem *item;
|
|
|
5317 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */
|
|
|
5318
|
|
|
5319 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data;
|
|
|
5320 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list);
|
|
|
5321 /*
|
|
|
5322 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not
|
|
|
5323 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't
|
|
|
5324 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It
|
|
|
5325 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can
|
|
|
5326 * never know :)
|
|
|
5327 *
|
|
|
5328 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to
|
|
|
5329 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support
|
|
|
5330 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango
|
|
|
5331 * functionality.
|
|
|
5332 */
|
|
|
5333 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U);
|
|
|
5334
|
|
|
5335 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be
|
|
|
5336 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */
|
|
|
5337 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine;
|
|
|
5338
|
|
|
5339 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length,
|
|
|
5340 &item->analysis, glyphs);
|
|
|
5341 /*
|
|
|
5342 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed
|
|
|
5343 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the
|
|
|
5344 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the
|
|
|
5345 * number of cells needed.
|
|
|
5346 *
|
|
|
5347 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing
|
|
|
5348 * characters right (and pretty too of course).
|
|
|
5349 */
|
|
|
5350 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i)
|
|
|
5351 {
|
|
|
5352 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph;
|
|
|
5353
|
|
|
5354 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i];
|
|
|
5355
|
|
|
5356 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start)
|
|
|
5357 {
|
|
|
5358 int cellcount;
|
|
|
5359
|
|
|
5360 cellcount = count_cluster_cells(
|
|
|
5361 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width,
|
|
|
5362 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL);
|
|
|
5363
|
|
|
5364 if (cellcount > 0)
|
|
|
5365 {
|
|
|
5366 int width;
|
|
|
5367
|
|
|
5368 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5369 glyph->geometry.x_offset +=
|
|
|
5370 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5371 glyph->geometry.width = width;
|
|
|
5372 }
|
|
|
5373 else
|
|
|
5374 {
|
|
|
5375 /* If there are only combining characters in the
|
|
|
5376 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the
|
|
|
5377 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore
|
|
|
5378 * some guesswork is needed. */
|
|
|
5379 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells,
|
|
|
5380 cluster_width,
|
|
|
5381 last_glyph_rbearing);
|
|
|
5382 }
|
|
|
5383
|
|
|
5384 item_cells += cellcount;
|
|
|
5385 cells = cellcount;
|
|
|
5386 }
|
|
|
5387 else if (i > 0)
|
|
|
5388 {
|
|
|
5389 int width;
|
|
|
5390
|
|
|
5391 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining
|
|
|
5392 * characters the canonical way. That is, setting the
|
|
|
5393 * width of the previous glyph to 0. */
|
|
|
5394 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5395
|
|
|
5396 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5397 glyph->geometry.x_offset +=
|
|
|
5398 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5399 glyph->geometry.width = width;
|
|
|
5400 }
|
|
|
5401 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */
|
|
|
5402 {
|
|
|
5403 glyph->geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5404 }
|
|
|
5405 }
|
|
|
5406
|
|
|
5407 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/
|
|
|
5408 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells,
|
|
|
5409 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs);
|
|
|
5410
|
|
|
5411 pango_item_free(item);
|
|
|
5412
|
|
|
5413 column_offset += item_cells;
|
|
|
5414 }
|
|
|
5415
|
|
|
5416 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list);
|
|
|
5417 }
|
|
|
5418
|
|
26
|
5419 skipitall:
|
|
7
|
5420 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL)
|
|
|
5421 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5422 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5423 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
5424 FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1,
|
|
|
5425 FILL_X(col + column_offset) - 1,
|
|
|
5426 FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1);
|
|
|
5427
|
|
|
5428 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs);
|
|
|
5429 vim_free(conv_buf);
|
|
|
5430
|
|
|
5431 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL);
|
|
|
5432
|
|
|
5433 return column_offset;
|
|
|
5434 }
|
|
|
5435 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5436
|
|
|
5437 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5438 void
|
|
|
5439 gui_mch_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags)
|
|
|
5440 {
|
|
|
5441 static XChar2b *buf = NULL;
|
|
|
5442 static int buflen = 0;
|
|
|
5443 int is_wide;
|
|
|
5444 XChar2b *text;
|
|
|
5445 int textlen;
|
|
|
5446 XFontStruct *xfont;
|
|
|
5447 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5448 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
5449 unsigned c;
|
|
|
5450 # endif
|
|
|
5451 int width;
|
|
|
5452
|
|
|
5453 if (gui.current_font == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5454 return;
|
|
|
5455
|
|
|
5456 /*
|
|
|
5457 * Yeah yeah apparently the font support in GTK+ 1.2 only cares for either:
|
|
|
5458 * asians or 8-bit fonts. It is broken there, but no wonder the whole font
|
|
|
5459 * stuff is broken in X11 in first place. And the internationalization API
|
|
|
5460 * isn't something you would really like to use.
|
|
|
5461 */
|
|
|
5462
|
|
|
5463 xfont = (XFontStruct *)((GdkFontPrivate*)gui.current_font)->xfont;
|
|
|
5464 is_wide = ((xfont->min_byte1 != 0 || xfont->max_byte1 != 0)
|
|
|
5465 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5466 && gui.fontset == NOFONTSET
|
|
|
5467 # endif
|
|
|
5468 );
|
|
|
5469
|
|
|
5470 if (is_wide)
|
|
|
5471 {
|
|
|
5472 /* Convert a byte sequence to 16 bit characters for the Gdk functions.
|
|
|
5473 * Need a buffer for the 16 bit characters. Keep it between calls,
|
|
|
5474 * because allocating it each time is slow. */
|
|
|
5475 if (buflen < len)
|
|
|
5476 {
|
|
|
5477 XtFree((char *)buf);
|
|
|
5478 buf = (XChar2b *)XtMalloc(len * sizeof(XChar2b));
|
|
|
5479 buflen = len;
|
|
|
5480 }
|
|
|
5481
|
|
|
5482 p = s;
|
|
|
5483 textlen = 0;
|
|
|
5484 width = 0;
|
|
|
5485 while (p < s + len)
|
|
|
5486 {
|
|
|
5487 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
5488 if (enc_utf8)
|
|
|
5489 {
|
|
|
5490 c = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5491 if (c >= 0x10000) /* show chars > 0xffff as ? */
|
|
|
5492 c = 0xbf;
|
|
|
5493 buf[textlen].byte1 = c >> 8;
|
|
|
5494 buf[textlen].byte2 = c;
|
|
|
5495 p += utf_ptr2len_check(p);
|
|
|
5496 width += utf_char2cells(c);
|
|
|
5497 }
|
|
|
5498 else
|
|
|
5499 # endif
|
|
|
5500 {
|
|
|
5501 buf[textlen].byte1 = '\0'; /* high eight bits */
|
|
|
5502 buf[textlen].byte2 = *p; /* low eight bits */
|
|
|
5503 ++p;
|
|
|
5504 ++width;
|
|
|
5505 }
|
|
|
5506 ++textlen;
|
|
|
5507 }
|
|
|
5508 text = buf;
|
|
|
5509 textlen = textlen * 2;
|
|
|
5510 }
|
|
|
5511 else
|
|
|
5512 {
|
|
|
5513 text = (XChar2b *)s;
|
|
|
5514 textlen = len;
|
|
|
5515 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
5516 if (has_mbyte)
|
|
|
5517 {
|
|
|
5518 width = 0;
|
|
|
5519 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p))
|
|
|
5520 width += (*mb_ptr2cells)(p);
|
|
|
5521 }
|
|
|
5522 else
|
|
|
5523 # endif
|
|
|
5524 width = len;
|
|
|
5525 }
|
|
|
5526
|
|
|
5527 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP))
|
|
|
5528 {
|
|
|
5529 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
5530 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5531 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5532 TRUE,
|
|
|
5533 FILL_X(col), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
5534 width * gui.char_width, gui.char_height);
|
|
|
5535 }
|
|
|
5536 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5537 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5538 gui.current_font,
|
|
|
5539 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5540 TEXT_X(col), TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5541 (const gchar *)text, textlen);
|
|
|
5542
|
|
|
5543 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */
|
|
|
5544 if (flags & DRAW_BOLD)
|
|
|
5545 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5546 gui.current_font,
|
|
|
5547 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5548 TEXT_X(col) + 1, TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5549 (const gchar *)text, textlen);
|
|
|
5550
|
|
|
5551 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL)
|
|
|
5552 {
|
|
|
5553 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5554 gui.text_gc, FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
5555 FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1, FILL_X(col + width) - 1, FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1);
|
|
|
5556 }
|
|
|
5557 }
|
|
|
5558 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5559
|
|
|
5560 /*
|
|
|
5561 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported.
|
|
|
5562 */
|
|
|
5563 int
|
|
|
5564 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name)
|
|
|
5565 {
|
|
|
5566 int i;
|
|
|
5567
|
|
|
5568 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++)
|
|
|
5569 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0
|
|
|
5570 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1)
|
|
|
5571 return OK;
|
|
|
5572 return FAIL;
|
|
|
5573 }
|
|
|
5574
|
|
|
5575 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) \
|
|
|
5576 || (defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)) \
|
|
|
5577 || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5578 /*
|
|
|
5579 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's
|
|
|
5580 */
|
|
|
5581 int
|
|
|
5582 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis)
|
|
|
5583 {
|
|
|
5584 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL)
|
|
|
5585 {
|
|
|
5586 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
5587 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
5588 return OK;
|
|
|
5589 }
|
|
|
5590
|
|
|
5591 *dis = NULL;
|
|
|
5592 *win = 0;
|
|
|
5593 return FAIL;
|
|
|
5594 }
|
|
|
5595 #endif
|
|
|
5596
|
|
|
5597 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \
|
|
|
5598 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5599
|
|
|
5600 Display *
|
|
|
5601 gui_mch_get_display(void)
|
|
|
5602 {
|
|
|
5603 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL)
|
|
|
5604 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
5605 else
|
|
|
5606 return NULL;
|
|
|
5607 }
|
|
|
5608 #endif
|
|
|
5609
|
|
|
5610 void
|
|
|
5611 gui_mch_beep(void)
|
|
|
5612 {
|
|
|
5613 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
5614 GdkDisplay *display;
|
|
|
5615
|
|
|
5616 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
5617 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
5618 else
|
|
|
5619 display = gdk_display_get_default();
|
|
|
5620
|
|
|
5621 if (display != NULL)
|
|
|
5622 gdk_display_beep(display);
|
|
|
5623 #else
|
|
|
5624 gdk_beep();
|
|
|
5625 #endif
|
|
|
5626 }
|
|
|
5627
|
|
|
5628 void
|
|
|
5629 gui_mch_flash(int msec)
|
|
|
5630 {
|
|
|
5631 GdkGCValues values;
|
|
|
5632 GdkGC *invert_gc;
|
|
|
5633
|
|
|
5634 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5635 return;
|
|
|
5636
|
|
|
5637 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
5638 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
5639 values.function = GDK_XOR;
|
|
|
5640 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5641 &values,
|
|
|
5642 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND |
|
|
|
5643 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND |
|
|
|
5644 GDK_GC_FUNCTION);
|
|
|
5645 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc,
|
|
|
5646 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
5647 /*
|
|
|
5648 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way,
|
|
|
5649 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that
|
|
|
5650 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on
|
|
|
5651 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we
|
|
|
5652 * intend it to do.
|
|
|
5653 */
|
|
|
5654 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
5655 TRUE,
|
|
|
5656 0, 0,
|
|
|
5657 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset,
|
|
|
5658 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset);
|
|
|
5659
|
|
|
5660 gui_mch_flush();
|
|
|
5661 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */
|
|
|
5662
|
|
|
5663 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
5664 TRUE,
|
|
|
5665 0, 0,
|
|
|
5666 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset,
|
|
|
5667 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset);
|
|
|
5668
|
|
|
5669 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc);
|
|
|
5670 }
|
|
|
5671
|
|
|
5672 /*
|
|
|
5673 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns.
|
|
|
5674 */
|
|
|
5675 void
|
|
|
5676 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc)
|
|
|
5677 {
|
|
|
5678 GdkGCValues values;
|
|
|
5679 GdkGC *invert_gc;
|
|
|
5680 GdkColor foreground;
|
|
|
5681 GdkColor background;
|
|
|
5682
|
|
|
5683 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5684 return;
|
|
|
5685
|
|
|
5686 foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
5687 background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
5688
|
|
|
5689 values.foreground = foreground;
|
|
|
5690 values.background = background;
|
|
|
5691 values.function = GDK_XOR;
|
|
|
5692 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5693 &values,
|
|
|
5694 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND |
|
|
|
5695 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND |
|
|
|
5696 GDK_GC_FUNCTION);
|
|
|
5697 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
5698 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
5699 TRUE,
|
|
|
5700 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r),
|
|
|
5701 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
5702 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc);
|
|
|
5703 }
|
|
|
5704
|
|
|
5705 /*
|
|
|
5706 * Iconify the GUI window.
|
|
|
5707 */
|
|
|
5708 void
|
|
|
5709 gui_mch_iconify(void)
|
|
|
5710 {
|
|
|
5711 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5712 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
5713 #else
|
|
|
5714 XIconifyWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
5715 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
5716 DefaultScreen(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window)));
|
|
|
5717 #endif
|
|
|
5718 }
|
|
|
5719
|
|
|
5720 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5721 /*
|
|
|
5722 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground.
|
|
|
5723 */
|
|
|
5724 void
|
|
|
5725 gui_mch_set_foreground(void)
|
|
|
5726 {
|
|
|
5727 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5728 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
5729 # else
|
|
|
5730 gdk_window_raise(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
5731 # endif
|
|
|
5732 }
|
|
|
5733 #endif
|
|
|
5734
|
|
|
5735 /*
|
|
|
5736 * Draw a cursor without focus.
|
|
|
5737 */
|
|
|
5738 void
|
|
|
5739 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5740 {
|
|
|
5741 int i = 1;
|
|
|
5742
|
|
|
5743 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5744 return;
|
|
|
5745
|
|
|
5746 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color);
|
|
|
5747
|
|
|
5748 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5749 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
5750 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col))
|
|
|
5751 i = 2;
|
|
|
5752 #endif
|
|
|
5753 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5754 FALSE,
|
|
|
5755 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row),
|
|
|
5756 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1);
|
|
|
5757 }
|
|
|
5758
|
|
|
5759 /*
|
|
|
5760 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using
|
|
|
5761 * color "color".
|
|
|
5762 */
|
|
|
5763 void
|
|
|
5764 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5765 {
|
|
|
5766 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5767 return;
|
|
|
5768
|
|
|
5769 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color);
|
|
|
5770
|
|
|
5771 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5772 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5773 TRUE,
|
|
|
5774 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
|
|
|
5775 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */
|
|
|
5776 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w :
|
|
|
5777 #endif
|
|
|
5778 FILL_X(gui.col),
|
|
|
5779 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h,
|
|
|
5780 w, h);
|
|
|
5781 }
|
|
|
5782
|
|
|
5783
|
|
|
5784 /*
|
|
|
5785 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the
|
|
|
5786 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is
|
|
|
5787 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return
|
|
|
5788 * immediately.
|
|
|
5789 */
|
|
|
5790 void
|
|
|
5791 gui_mch_update(void)
|
|
|
5792 {
|
|
|
5793 while (gtk_events_pending() && !vim_is_input_buf_full())
|
|
|
5794 gtk_main_iteration_do(FALSE);
|
|
|
5795 }
|
|
|
5796
|
|
|
5797 static gint
|
|
|
5798 input_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
5799 {
|
|
|
5800 int *timed_out = (int *) data;
|
|
|
5801
|
|
|
5802 /* Just inform the caller about the occurence of it */
|
|
|
5803 *timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
5804
|
|
|
5805 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
5806 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
5807
|
|
|
5808 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
5809 }
|
|
|
5810
|
|
|
5811 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
5812 /*
|
|
|
5813 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection.
|
|
|
5814 */
|
|
|
5815 /* ARGSUSED */
|
|
|
5816 static void
|
|
|
5817 sniff_request_cb(
|
|
|
5818 gpointer data,
|
|
|
5819 gint source_fd,
|
|
|
5820 GdkInputCondition condition)
|
|
|
5821 {
|
|
|
5822 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF};
|
|
|
5823
|
|
|
5824 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3);
|
|
|
5825
|
|
|
5826 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
5827 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
5828 }
|
|
|
5829 #endif
|
|
|
5830
|
|
|
5831 /*
|
|
|
5832 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character
|
|
|
5833 * from the keyboard.
|
|
|
5834 * wtime == -1 Wait forever.
|
|
|
5835 * wtime == 0 This should never happen.
|
|
|
5836 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character.
|
|
|
5837 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time,
|
|
|
5838 * or FAIL otherwise.
|
|
|
5839 */
|
|
|
5840 int
|
|
|
5841 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime)
|
|
|
5842 {
|
|
|
5843 int focus;
|
|
|
5844 guint timer;
|
|
|
5845 static int timed_out;
|
|
|
5846 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
5847 static int sniff_on = 0;
|
|
|
5848 static gint sniff_input_id = 0;
|
|
|
5849 #endif
|
|
|
5850
|
|
|
5851 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
5852 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request)
|
|
|
5853 {
|
|
|
5854 if (sniff_input_id)
|
|
|
5855 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id);
|
|
|
5856 sniff_on = 0;
|
|
|
5857 }
|
|
|
5858 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request)
|
|
|
5859 {
|
|
|
5860 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */
|
|
|
5861 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff,
|
|
|
5862 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
5863 sniff_on = 1;
|
|
|
5864 }
|
|
|
5865 #endif
|
|
|
5866
|
|
|
5867 timed_out = FALSE;
|
|
|
5868
|
|
|
5869 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in
|
|
|
5870 * time */
|
|
|
5871
|
|
|
5872 if (wtime > 0)
|
|
|
5873 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out);
|
|
|
5874 else
|
|
|
5875 timer = 0;
|
|
|
5876
|
|
|
5877 focus = gui.in_focus;
|
|
|
5878
|
|
|
5879 do
|
|
|
5880 {
|
|
|
5881 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */
|
|
|
5882 if (gui.in_focus != focus)
|
|
|
5883 {
|
|
|
5884 if (gui.in_focus)
|
|
|
5885 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
5886 else
|
|
|
5887 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
5888 focus = gui.in_focus;
|
|
|
5889 }
|
|
|
5890
|
|
|
5891 /*
|
|
|
5892 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs.
|
|
22
|
5893 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare
|
|
|
5894 * situations, sort of race condition).
|
|
7
|
5895 */
|
|
22
|
5896 if (!input_available())
|
|
|
5897 gtk_main();
|
|
7
|
5898
|
|
|
5899 /* Got char, return immediately */
|
|
|
5900 if (input_available())
|
|
|
5901 {
|
|
|
5902 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out)
|
|
|
5903 gtk_timeout_remove(timer);
|
|
|
5904 return OK;
|
|
|
5905 }
|
|
|
5906 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out);
|
|
|
5907
|
|
|
5908 /*
|
|
|
5909 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events.
|
|
|
5910 */
|
|
|
5911 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
5912
|
|
|
5913 return FAIL;
|
|
|
5914 }
|
|
|
5915
|
|
|
5916
|
|
|
5917 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
5918 * Output drawing routines.
|
|
|
5919 ****************************************************************************/
|
|
|
5920
|
|
|
5921
|
|
|
5922 /* Flush any output to the screen */
|
|
|
5923 void
|
|
|
5924 gui_mch_flush(void)
|
|
|
5925 {
|
|
|
5926 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
5927 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
5928 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
5929 #else
|
|
|
5930 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */
|
|
|
5931 #endif
|
|
|
5932 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5933 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do,
|
|
|
5934 * according to the comment above. */
|
|
|
5935 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
5936 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE);
|
|
|
5937 #endif
|
|
|
5938 }
|
|
|
5939
|
|
|
5940 /*
|
|
|
5941 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to
|
|
|
5942 * (row2, col2) inclusive.
|
|
|
5943 */
|
|
|
5944 void
|
|
|
5945 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2)
|
|
|
5946 {
|
|
|
5947 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
5948
|
|
|
5949 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5950 return;
|
|
|
5951
|
|
|
5952 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
5953
|
|
|
5954 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color);
|
|
|
5955
|
|
|
5956 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have
|
|
|
5957 * spilled over to the window border. */
|
|
|
5958 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE,
|
|
|
5959 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1),
|
|
|
5960 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width
|
|
|
5961 + (col2 == Columns - 1),
|
|
|
5962 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
5963 }
|
|
|
5964
|
|
|
5965 void
|
|
|
5966 gui_mch_clear_all(void)
|
|
|
5967 {
|
|
|
5968 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
5969 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
5970 }
|
|
|
5971
|
|
|
5972 /*
|
|
|
5973 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down.
|
|
|
5974 */
|
|
|
5975 static void
|
|
|
5976 check_copy_area(void)
|
|
|
5977 {
|
|
|
5978 GdkEvent *event;
|
|
|
5979 int expose_count;
|
|
|
5980
|
|
|
5981 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL)
|
|
|
5982 return;
|
|
|
5983
|
|
|
5984 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where
|
|
|
5985 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call
|
|
|
5986 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick
|
|
|
5987 * fix for now. */
|
|
|
5988 gui_dont_update_cursor();
|
|
|
5989
|
|
|
5990 do
|
|
|
5991 {
|
|
|
5992 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */
|
|
|
5993 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
5994
|
|
|
5995 if (event == NULL)
|
|
|
5996 break; /* received NoExpose event */
|
|
|
5997
|
|
|
5998 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y,
|
|
|
5999 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height);
|
|
|
6000
|
|
|
6001 expose_count = event->expose.count;
|
|
|
6002 gdk_event_free(event);
|
|
|
6003 }
|
|
|
6004 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */
|
|
|
6005
|
|
|
6006 gui_can_update_cursor();
|
|
|
6007 }
|
|
|
6008
|
|
|
6009 /*
|
|
|
6010 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any
|
|
|
6011 * text further down within the scroll region.
|
|
|
6012 */
|
|
|
6013 void
|
|
|
6014 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines)
|
|
|
6015 {
|
|
|
6016 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED)
|
|
|
6017 return; /* Can't see the window */
|
|
|
6018
|
|
|
6019 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6020 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6021
|
|
|
6022 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */
|
|
|
6023 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6024 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6025 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6026 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left),
|
|
|
6027 FILL_Y(row + num_lines),
|
|
|
6028 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right
|
|
|
6029 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1,
|
|
|
6030 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1));
|
|
|
6031
|
|
|
6032 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1,
|
|
|
6033 gui.scroll_region_left,
|
|
|
6034 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right);
|
|
|
6035 check_copy_area();
|
|
|
6036 }
|
|
|
6037
|
|
|
6038 /*
|
|
|
6039 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any
|
|
|
6040 * following text within the scroll region.
|
|
|
6041 */
|
|
|
6042 void
|
|
|
6043 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines)
|
|
|
6044 {
|
|
|
6045 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED)
|
|
|
6046 return; /* Can't see the window */
|
|
|
6047
|
|
|
6048 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6049 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6050
|
|
|
6051 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */
|
|
|
6052 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6053 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines),
|
|
|
6054 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6055 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6056 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right
|
|
|
6057 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1,
|
|
|
6058 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1));
|
|
|
6059
|
|
|
6060 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left,
|
|
|
6061 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right);
|
|
|
6062 check_copy_area();
|
|
|
6063 }
|
|
|
6064
|
|
|
6065 /*
|
|
|
6066 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows.
|
|
|
6067 */
|
|
|
6068 void
|
|
|
6069 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6070 {
|
|
|
6071 GdkAtom target;
|
|
|
6072 unsigned i;
|
|
|
6073 int nbytes;
|
|
|
6074 char_u *buffer;
|
|
|
6075
|
|
|
6076 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i)
|
|
|
6077 {
|
|
|
6078 received_selection = RS_NONE;
|
|
|
6079 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE);
|
|
|
6080
|
|
|
6081 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
6082 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target,
|
|
|
6083 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6084
|
|
|
6085 while (received_selection == RS_NONE)
|
|
|
6086 gtk_main(); /* wait for selection_received_cb */
|
|
|
6087
|
|
|
6088 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL)
|
|
|
6089 return;
|
|
|
6090 }
|
|
|
6091
|
|
|
6092 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */
|
|
|
6093 nbytes = 0;
|
|
|
6094 buffer = (char_u *)XFetchBuffer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6095 &nbytes, 0);
|
|
|
6096 if (nbytes > 0)
|
|
|
6097 {
|
|
|
6098 /* Got something */
|
|
|
6099 clip_yank_selection(MCHAR, buffer, (long)nbytes, cbd);
|
|
|
6100 if (p_verbose > 0)
|
|
|
6101 smsg((char_u *)_("Used CUT_BUFFER0 instead of empty selection"));
|
|
|
6102 }
|
|
|
6103 if (buffer != NULL)
|
|
|
6104 XFree(buffer);
|
|
|
6105 }
|
|
|
6106
|
|
|
6107 /*
|
|
|
6108 * Disown the selection.
|
|
|
6109 */
|
|
|
6110 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
6111 void
|
|
|
6112 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6113 {
|
|
|
6114 /* WEIRD: when using NULL to actually disown the selection, we lose the
|
|
|
6115 * selection the first time we own it. */
|
|
|
6116 /*
|
|
|
6117 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6118 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6119 */
|
|
|
6120 }
|
|
|
6121
|
|
|
6122 /*
|
|
|
6123 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked.
|
|
|
6124 */
|
|
|
6125 int
|
|
|
6126 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6127 {
|
|
|
6128 int success;
|
|
|
6129
|
|
|
6130 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom,
|
|
|
6131 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6132 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6133 return (success) ? OK : FAIL;
|
|
|
6134 }
|
|
|
6135
|
|
|
6136 /*
|
|
|
6137 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we
|
|
|
6138 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app.
|
|
|
6139 */
|
|
|
6140 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
6141 void
|
|
|
6142 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6143 {
|
|
|
6144 }
|
|
|
6145
|
|
|
6146
|
|
|
6147 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6148 /*
|
|
|
6149 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey).
|
|
|
6150 */
|
|
|
6151 void
|
|
|
6152 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey)
|
|
|
6153 {
|
|
|
6154 if (menu->id == NULL)
|
|
|
6155 return;
|
|
|
6156
|
|
|
6157 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name))
|
|
|
6158 grey = TRUE;
|
|
|
6159
|
|
|
6160 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE);
|
|
|
6161 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */
|
|
|
6162 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey)
|
|
|
6163 {
|
|
|
6164 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey);
|
|
|
6165 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6166 }
|
|
|
6167 }
|
|
|
6168
|
|
|
6169 /*
|
|
|
6170 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden.
|
|
|
6171 */
|
|
|
6172 void
|
|
|
6173 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden)
|
|
|
6174 {
|
|
|
6175 if (menu->id == 0)
|
|
|
6176 return;
|
|
|
6177
|
|
|
6178 if (hidden)
|
|
|
6179 {
|
|
|
6180 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id))
|
|
|
6181 {
|
|
|
6182 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id);
|
|
|
6183 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6184 }
|
|
|
6185 }
|
|
|
6186 else
|
|
|
6187 {
|
|
|
6188 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id))
|
|
|
6189 {
|
|
|
6190 gtk_widget_show(menu->id);
|
|
|
6191 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6192 }
|
|
|
6193 }
|
|
|
6194 }
|
|
|
6195
|
|
|
6196 /*
|
|
|
6197 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not.
|
|
|
6198 */
|
|
|
6199 void
|
|
|
6200 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void)
|
|
|
6201 {
|
|
|
6202 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */
|
|
|
6203 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6204 }
|
|
|
6205 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
6206
|
|
|
6207 /*
|
|
|
6208 * Scrollbar stuff.
|
|
|
6209 */
|
|
|
6210 void
|
|
|
6211 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag)
|
|
|
6212 {
|
|
|
6213 if (sb->id == NULL)
|
|
|
6214 return;
|
|
|
6215
|
|
|
6216 if (flag)
|
|
|
6217 gtk_widget_show(sb->id);
|
|
|
6218 else
|
|
|
6219 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id);
|
|
|
6220
|
|
|
6221 update_window_manager_hints();
|
|
|
6222 }
|
|
|
6223
|
|
|
6224
|
|
|
6225 /*
|
|
|
6226 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long.
|
|
|
6227 */
|
|
|
6228 long_u
|
|
|
6229 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel)
|
|
|
6230 {
|
|
|
6231 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
6232 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6233 GdkColorContext *cc;
|
|
|
6234
|
|
|
6235 cc = gdk_color_context_new(gtk_widget_get_visual(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
6236 gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea));
|
|
|
6237 color.pixel = pixel;
|
|
|
6238 gdk_color_context_query_color(cc, &color);
|
|
|
6239
|
|
|
6240 gdk_color_context_free(cc);
|
|
|
6241 #else
|
|
|
6242 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
6243 (unsigned long)pixel, &color);
|
|
|
6244 #endif
|
|
|
6245
|
|
|
6246 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8)
|
|
|
6247 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00)
|
|
|
6248 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8);
|
|
|
6249 }
|
|
|
6250
|
|
|
6251 /*
|
|
|
6252 * Get current y mouse coordinate in text window.
|
|
|
6253 * Return -1 when unknown.
|
|
|
6254 */
|
|
|
6255 int
|
|
|
6256 gui_mch_get_mouse_x(void)
|
|
|
6257 {
|
|
|
6258 int win_x;
|
|
|
6259
|
|
|
6260 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &win_x, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
6261 return win_x;
|
|
|
6262 }
|
|
|
6263
|
|
|
6264 int
|
|
|
6265 gui_mch_get_mouse_y(void)
|
|
|
6266 {
|
|
|
6267 int win_y;
|
|
|
6268
|
|
|
6269 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, NULL, &win_y, NULL);
|
|
|
6270 return win_y;
|
|
|
6271 }
|
|
|
6272
|
|
|
6273 void
|
|
|
6274 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y)
|
|
|
6275 {
|
|
|
6276 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no
|
|
|
6277 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good
|
|
|
6278 * reason...) */
|
|
|
6279 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window),
|
|
|
6280 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window),
|
|
|
6281 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y);
|
|
|
6282 }
|
|
|
6283
|
|
|
6284
|
|
|
6285 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE
|
|
|
6286 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes
|
|
|
6287 * from hidden to not hidden. */
|
|
|
6288 static int last_shape = 0;
|
|
|
6289 #endif
|
|
|
6290
|
|
|
6291 /*
|
|
|
6292 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not.
|
|
|
6293 *
|
|
|
6294 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr
|
|
|
6295 */
|
|
|
6296 void
|
|
|
6297 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide)
|
|
|
6298 {
|
|
|
6299 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide)
|
|
|
6300 {
|
|
|
6301 gui.pointer_hidden = hide;
|
|
|
6302 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL)
|
|
|
6303 {
|
|
|
6304 if (hide)
|
|
|
6305 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
6306 else
|
|
|
6307 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE
|
|
|
6308 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape);
|
|
|
6309 #else
|
|
|
6310 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL);
|
|
|
6311 #endif
|
|
|
6312 }
|
|
|
6313 }
|
|
|
6314 }
|
|
|
6315
|
|
|
6316 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6317
|
|
|
6318 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in
|
|
|
6319 * misc2.c! */
|
|
|
6320 static const int mshape_ids[] =
|
|
|
6321 {
|
|
|
6322 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */
|
|
|
6323 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */
|
|
|
6324 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */
|
|
|
6325 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */
|
|
|
6326 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */
|
|
|
6327 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */
|
|
|
6328 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */
|
|
|
6329 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */
|
|
|
6330 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */
|
|
|
6331 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */
|
|
|
6332 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */
|
|
|
6333 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */
|
|
|
6334 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */
|
|
|
6335 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */
|
|
|
6336 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */
|
|
|
6337 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */
|
|
|
6338 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */
|
|
|
6339 };
|
|
|
6340
|
|
|
6341 void
|
|
|
6342 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape)
|
|
|
6343 {
|
|
|
6344 int id;
|
|
|
6345 GdkCursor *c;
|
|
|
6346
|
|
|
6347 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6348 return;
|
|
|
6349
|
|
|
6350 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden)
|
|
|
6351 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
6352 else
|
|
|
6353 {
|
|
|
6354 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED)
|
|
|
6355 {
|
|
|
6356 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED;
|
|
|
6357 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR)
|
|
|
6358 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR;
|
|
|
6359 else
|
|
|
6360 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */
|
|
|
6361 }
|
|
|
6362 else
|
|
|
6363 id = mshape_ids[shape];
|
|
|
6364 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6365 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display(
|
|
|
6366 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), id);
|
|
|
6367 # else
|
|
|
6368 c = gdk_cursor_new(id);
|
|
|
6369 # endif
|
|
|
6370 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c);
|
|
|
6371 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */
|
|
|
6372 }
|
|
|
6373 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE)
|
|
|
6374 last_shape = shape;
|
|
|
6375 }
|
|
|
6376 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */
|
|
|
6377
|
|
|
6378
|
|
|
6379 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6380 /*
|
|
|
6381 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be
|
|
|
6382 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image
|
|
|
6383 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap
|
|
|
6384 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's
|
|
|
6385 * too small.
|
|
|
6386 */
|
|
|
6387 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width)
|
|
|
6388 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height)
|
|
|
6389 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH)
|
|
|
6390
|
|
|
6391 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6392
|
|
|
6393 void
|
|
|
6394 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr)
|
|
|
6395 {
|
|
|
6396 GdkPixbuf *sign;
|
|
|
6397
|
|
|
6398 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr);
|
|
|
6399
|
|
|
6400 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6401 {
|
|
|
6402 int width;
|
|
|
6403 int height;
|
|
|
6404 int xoffset;
|
|
|
6405 int yoffset;
|
|
|
6406 int need_scale;
|
|
|
6407
|
|
|
6408 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign);
|
|
|
6409 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign);
|
|
|
6410 /*
|
|
|
6411 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border
|
|
|
6412 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for
|
|
|
6413 * tiny differences in font size.
|
|
|
6414 */
|
|
|
6415 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2
|
|
|
6416 || height > SIGN_HEIGHT + 2
|
|
|
6417 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4
|
|
|
6418 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4));
|
|
|
6419 if (need_scale)
|
|
|
6420 {
|
|
|
6421 double aspect;
|
|
|
6422
|
|
|
6423 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */
|
|
|
6424 aspect = (double)height / (double)width;
|
|
|
6425 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect;
|
|
|
6426 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH);
|
|
|
6427 height = (double)width * aspect;
|
|
|
6428
|
|
|
6429 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so
|
|
|
6430 * would complicate the code quite a bit. */
|
|
|
6431 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height,
|
|
|
6432 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR);
|
|
|
6433 if (sign == NULL)
|
|
|
6434 return; /* out of memory */
|
|
|
6435 }
|
|
|
6436
|
|
|
6437 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore
|
|
|
6438 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than
|
|
|
6439 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */
|
|
|
6440 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2;
|
|
|
6441 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2;
|
|
|
6442
|
|
|
6443 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6444
|
|
|
6445 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6446 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6447 TRUE,
|
|
|
6448 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
6449 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6450 SIGN_WIDTH,
|
|
|
6451 SIGN_HEIGHT);
|
|
|
6452
|
|
|
6453 # if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,1)
|
|
|
6454 gdk_draw_pixbuf(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6455 NULL,
|
|
|
6456 sign,
|
|
|
6457 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6458 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6459 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6460 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6461 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
6462 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT),
|
|
|
6463 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL,
|
|
|
6464 0, 0);
|
|
|
6465 # else
|
|
|
6466 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign,
|
|
|
6467 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6468 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6469 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6470 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6471 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6472 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
6473 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT),
|
|
|
6474 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL,
|
|
|
6475 127,
|
|
|
6476 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL,
|
|
|
6477 0, 0);
|
|
|
6478 # endif
|
|
|
6479 if (need_scale)
|
|
|
6480 g_object_unref(sign);
|
|
|
6481 }
|
|
|
6482 }
|
|
|
6483
|
|
|
6484 void *
|
|
|
6485 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile)
|
|
|
6486 {
|
|
|
6487 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use)
|
|
|
6488 {
|
|
|
6489 GdkPixbuf *sign;
|
|
|
6490 GError *error = NULL;
|
|
|
6491 char_u *message;
|
|
|
6492
|
|
|
6493 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error);
|
|
|
6494
|
|
|
6495 if (error == NULL)
|
|
|
6496 return sign;
|
|
|
6497
|
|
|
6498 message = (char_u *)error->message;
|
|
|
6499
|
|
|
6500 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
6501 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL);
|
|
|
6502
|
|
|
6503 if (message != NULL)
|
|
|
6504 {
|
|
|
6505 /* The error message is already translated and will be more
|
|
|
6506 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */
|
|
|
6507 EMSG2("E255: %s", message);
|
|
|
6508
|
|
|
6509 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
6510 vim_free(message);
|
|
|
6511 }
|
|
|
6512 g_error_free(error);
|
|
|
6513 }
|
|
|
6514
|
|
|
6515 return NULL;
|
|
|
6516 }
|
|
|
6517
|
|
|
6518 void
|
|
|
6519 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign)
|
|
|
6520 {
|
|
|
6521 if (sign != NULL)
|
|
|
6522 g_object_unref(sign);
|
|
|
6523 }
|
|
|
6524
|
|
|
6525 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
6526
|
|
|
6527 typedef struct
|
|
|
6528 {
|
|
|
6529 GdkPixmap *pixmap;
|
|
|
6530 GdkBitmap *mask;
|
|
|
6531 }
|
|
|
6532 signicon_T;
|
|
|
6533
|
|
|
6534 void
|
|
|
6535 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr)
|
|
|
6536 {
|
|
|
6537 signicon_T *sign;
|
|
|
6538
|
|
|
6539 sign = (signicon_T *)sign_get_image(typenr);
|
|
|
6540
|
|
|
6541 if (sign != NULL && sign->pixmap != NULL
|
|
|
6542 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6543 {
|
|
|
6544 int width;
|
|
|
6545 int height;
|
|
|
6546 int xoffset;
|
|
|
6547 int yoffset;
|
|
|
6548
|
|
|
6549 gdk_window_get_size(sign->pixmap, &width, &height);
|
|
|
6550
|
|
|
6551 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore
|
|
|
6552 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than
|
|
|
6553 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */
|
|
|
6554 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2;
|
|
|
6555 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2;
|
|
|
6556
|
|
|
6557 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6558
|
|
|
6559 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6560 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6561 TRUE,
|
|
|
6562 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
6563 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6564 SIGN_WIDTH,
|
|
|
6565 SIGN_HEIGHT);
|
|
|
6566
|
|
|
6567 /* Set the clip mask for bilevel transparency */
|
|
|
6568 if (sign->mask != NULL)
|
|
|
6569 {
|
|
|
6570 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6571 FILL_X(col) - xoffset,
|
|
|
6572 FILL_Y(row) - yoffset);
|
|
|
6573 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, sign->mask);
|
|
|
6574 }
|
|
|
6575
|
|
|
6576 gdk_draw_pixmap(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6577 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6578 sign->pixmap,
|
|
|
6579 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6580 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6581 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6582 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6583 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
6584 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT));
|
|
|
6585
|
|
|
6586 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, NULL);
|
|
|
6587 }
|
|
|
6588 }
|
|
|
6589
|
|
|
6590 void *
|
|
|
6591 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile)
|
|
|
6592 {
|
|
|
6593 signicon_T *sign = NULL;
|
|
|
6594
|
|
|
6595 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-'
|
|
|
6596 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6597 {
|
|
|
6598 sign = (signicon_T *)alloc(sizeof(signicon_T));
|
|
|
6599
|
|
|
6600 if (sign != NULL) /* NULL == OOM == "cannot really happen" */
|
|
|
6601 {
|
|
|
6602 sign->mask = NULL;
|
|
|
6603 sign->pixmap = gdk_pixmap_colormap_create_from_xpm(
|
|
|
6604 gui.drawarea->window, NULL,
|
|
|
6605 &sign->mask, NULL,
|
|
|
6606 (const char *)signfile);
|
|
|
6607
|
|
|
6608 if (sign->pixmap == NULL)
|
|
|
6609 {
|
|
|
6610 vim_free(sign);
|
|
|
6611 sign = NULL;
|
|
|
6612 EMSG(_(e_signdata));
|
|
|
6613 }
|
|
|
6614 }
|
|
|
6615 }
|
|
|
6616 return sign;
|
|
|
6617 }
|
|
|
6618
|
|
|
6619 void
|
|
|
6620 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign)
|
|
|
6621 {
|
|
|
6622 if (sign != NULL)
|
|
|
6623 {
|
|
|
6624 signicon_T *signicon = (signicon_T *)sign;
|
|
|
6625
|
|
|
6626 if (signicon->pixmap != NULL)
|
|
|
6627 gdk_pixmap_unref(signicon->pixmap);
|
|
|
6628 if (signicon->mask != NULL)
|
|
|
6629 gdk_bitmap_unref(signicon->mask);
|
|
|
6630
|
|
|
6631 vim_free(signicon);
|
|
|
6632 }
|
|
|
6633 }
|
|
|
6634 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
6635
|
|
|
6636 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */
|
|
|
6637
|
